JP7027582B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, a gaming ball, which is a gaming medium, is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who can easily win a prize when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds).
An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round.

Some such gaming machines are configured to be able to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and are configured to be able to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can be switched between an effect mode in which a change effect can be executed and an effect mode in which the change effect is not executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-154643 (paragraph 0007, FIG. 30)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable by sharing the display layout related to the specific display in the plurality of effect modes in which the execution ratios of the change effects are different. be.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide an improvement in amusement entertainment.

The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. In addition, although the description of the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added for reference, the components of the present invention are not limited to those with the reference numerals.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
It is a gaming machine capable of variable display,
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display is provided.
As the change effect, the change effect execution means can execute an effect of changing the specific display of the first aspect to the second aspect having a higher advantage than the first aspect.
The second aspect includes a predetermined aspect and a specific aspect having a higher advantage than the predetermined aspect.
The change effect executing means is
As a change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third aspect when the specific display of the first aspect is not changed to the second aspect.
It is based on a first pattern in which the display mode of the specific display changed to the third aspect is changed to the specific mode, and a second pattern in which the display mode of the specific display changed to the third aspect is continuously displayed as it is. The production is feasible,
It is possible to execute the effect of the second pattern at a higher rate than the effect of the first pattern.
It is possible to execute multiple types of change effects with different rates of changing the display mode of a specific display.
The specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower rate of change to the predetermined mode than the specific display displayed by the first aspect.
Further comprising limiting means capable of limiting the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of directed symbols) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A plurality of information (hold display, first hold display guide 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guide 100) including specific display (hold display) corresponding to hold storage which is information related to variable display.
2a to 1002d) can be displayed by the effect display means (first hold storage display unit 9a, second hold storage display unit 9b), and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the variable display corresponding to the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed (steps S220 and S2 in the game control microcomputer 560).
22) and
Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a specific effect (pre-reading advance notice effect including the hold notice effect) including a change effect (a hold notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display) that changes the display mode of the specific display. Specific effect executing means (parts for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, S8106 to S8114 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and
A plurality of effect modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution ratio of the specific effect are different (a sunny mode and a rain mode in which the hold display can be visually recognized and the hold notice effect can be executed, and the effect mode during the variable display. The effect control means (in FIG. 66, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a background image according to the selected effect mode) that can control the hold display to a lightning mode in which the hold display is invisible and the hold notice effect is not executed. When displaying on the device 9, the hold display can be displayed in the sunny mode and the rain mode, and the hold display is hidden in the lightning mode).
Among the display layouts of the effect display means, the display layout related to the specific display differs depending on the effect mode (in the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display, and the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d). , And the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are all displayed, but in the lightning mode, all of these information are hidden).
According to such a configuration, when there are a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to apply a display layout according to the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
The gaming machine of means 2 is
Variable display (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of special symbols, variable display of production symbols, in the case of slot machines, left reel in which multiple identifiable symbols are arranged on the outer circumference in a predetermined order, middle Rotation of the reel and the right reel) is performed, and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (such as a big hit game state in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, AT, RT, ART, etc. in the case of the slot machine).
It is a game machine that can be controlled (pachinko game machine 1, slot machine),
Specific display corresponding to variable display (hold display and active display in the case of pachinko game machine 1, and AT, RT, ART, etc. in the case of slot machines, each controlled to the advantageous state when won. Specific display means (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 1, first hold storage display unit 9a, second hold storage display unit 9b, and active display guide 1000, in the case of slot machine, directing) capable of displaying specific display means (specific display corresponding to the game). Sub control unit mounted on the control board (sub C)
An effect display means (effect display device 9 or the like) capable of displaying a plurality of information including a display control (a liquid crystal display capable of displaying a specific display) by a PU), and
Judgment means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition related to the variable display is satisfied (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, steps S220 and S22 in the game control microcomputer 560).
2. The part that executes S61, in the case of a slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU)
AT lottery, RT lottery, and ART lottery, as well as AT, RT, based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after operating the start switch). And the part where the lottery is done by adding the number of ARTs),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a change effect for changing the aspect of the specific display to a specific aspect (for example, a special aspect of a triangle or a square, a blue aspect, a red aspect) suggesting that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute specific effects including (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 1, a hold notice effect, an active notice effect, and in the case of a slot machine, an effect of changing the display mode of a specific display corresponding to an unexecuted game or a running game). Specific effect execution means (in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the effect control microcomputer 100, in the case of the slot machine, the sub control unit (sub CPU)),
A plurality of effect modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution ratio of the specific effect are different (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hold display can be visually recognized and the hold notice effect can be executed. The effect mode control means (in FIG. 66, the effect) that can be controlled to the sunny mode and the rain mode, the lightning mode in which the hold display is invisible and the hold notice effect is not executed, and the effect modes corresponding to these in the case of a slot machine). When the control microcomputer 100 displays the background image corresponding to the selected effect mode on the effect display device 9, the hold display can be displayed in the case of the sunny mode and the rain mode, and the hold display can be displayed in the case of the lightning mode. It is equipped with a part that sets the hold display to be hidden, and a sub control unit (sub CPU) in the case of a slot machine.
Among the display layouts of the effect display means, the display layout related to the specific display differs depending on the effect mode (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display, and the active display guide 1000, No. 1 1 Hold display guide 10
01a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are both displayed, but in the lightning mode, all of this information is hidden. In the case of a slot machine, an effect corresponding to the sunny mode and the rain mode. In the mode, the specific display is displayed, whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the lightning mode, the specific display is not displayed).
According to such a configuration, when there are a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to apply a display layout according to the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine of means 1 or 2,
The effect mode control means can display a specific display during the variable display, and can execute the specific effect (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the sunny mode and the rain mode, and in the case of the slot machine, this). (Equivalent effect mode) and a second effect mode in which the specific display is hidden during variable display and the specific effect is not executed (lightning mode in the case of pachinko gaming machine 1 and equivalent effect mode in the case of slot machines). And can be controlled,
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the second effect mode in which the specific effect is not executed, the specific display is hidden during the variable display, so that the specific display is displayed even though the specific effect is not executed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
It is a gaming machine of means 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine).
An effect display means (effect display device 9 or the like) including the specific display means is provided.
The display layout for information different from the specific display differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (in the lightning mode, unlike the sunny mode and the rain mode, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, first. 2 Hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, active display guide 1000, etc. are not displayed),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to apply an appropriate display layout according to each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
A gaming machine of means 3 or 4 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine).
Motion detection means (push sensor 124, tilt direction sensor unit 123) capable of detecting the movement of the player (operation of the push button 120, operation of the stick controller 122, etc.)
Equipped with an effect control board 80, etc. to which
The effect mode control means switches between the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on the movement of the player.
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the player can select which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode to play the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
Any gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) selected from means 3 to 5.
An effect control including a RAM having a reserved storage means capable of storing a plurality of reserved storages (a first reserved storage area for storing a first reserved storage area and a second reserved storage area for storing a second reserved storage area). Microcomputer 100) and
Notification means for recognizablely notifying the number of reserved storages regardless of whether or not the second effect mode is controlled (first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and second displaying the first reserved storage number).
A second reserved storage number special display area 1012) for displaying the reserved storage number is provided.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the number of reserved memories even when the second effect mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
Any gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine) selected from means 3 to 6.
In a display device (effect display device 9, etc.) capable of displaying a specific display (hold display, active display), common information can be displayed regardless of the effect mode (for example, the remaining variable display that can be executed in the probabilistic state). The number of times (the number of remaining STs in the so-called ST machine), the number of remaining fluctuations that can be displayed in the time-saving state, the number of consecutive villas, the number of balls to be ejected during the consecutive villas, etc. are displayed in any production mode),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the information to be displayed regardless of the effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
Any gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine) selected from means 3 to 7.
As the first effect mode, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution ratios of the specific effects are different (the execution ratio of the hold notice effect in the rain mode is lower than the execution ratio of the hold notice effect in the sunny mode).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by the variety of the first production mode.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
Any gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine) selected from means 3 to 8.
Steps S220, S222, and S61 in the gaming control microcomputer 560 in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed as a determination means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Part, in the case of a slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU) draws AT based on the game status indicated by the current game status flag stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after operating the start switch). , RT lottery, ART lottery, and additional lottery for AT, RT, and ART times) and
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the advance notice effect execution means (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control microcomputer) capable of executing the advance notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation) for notifying that the pachinko machine is controlled to the advantageous state. 100, in the case of a slot machine, the sub control unit (sub CPU)
)) And
The type of the advance notice effect differs depending on the effect mode (there is an effect that can be executed only in the lightning mode (blackout notice, lightning effect notice effect) that is not executed in the sunny mode and the rain mode).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the advance notice effect executed in each effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
Any gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine) selected from means 3 to 9.
Steps S220, S222, and S61 in the gaming control microcomputer 560 in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed as a determination means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Part, in the case of a slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU) starts the game (immediately after operating the start switch),
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the advance notice effect execution means (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control microcomputer) capable of executing the advance notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation) for notifying that the pachinko machine is controlled to the advantageous state. 100, in the case of a slot machine, the sub control unit (sub CPU)
)) And
It is possible to execute a common type of advance notice effect regardless of the effect mode (in any effect mode, a cut-in notice after the reach state is established can be executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of advance notice effects and an increase in the control load.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
Any gaming machine selected from means 1 to 10 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine)
And
As the change effect, the specific effect executing means displays the specific display by the first mode (for example, special hold, or may be a normal hold), and then changes the display mode of the specific display (for example, an action effect). It is possible to execute the accompanying hold notice effect (for example, steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, S8106 to the effect control microcomputer 100).
The part that executes S8114),
The display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode and the second mode having a high advantage (for example, blue hold, red hold).
The specific effect executing means is
As the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect (for example, shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and 40 (E)). Change patterns 33 to 36 and change patterns 405 to 41 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to 41 (I).
When executing the hold notice effect based on 4, the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold),
Depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, the change effect can be executed at different ratios after the change effect (for example, when the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect but does not change as a special hold. After that, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, , After that, the action effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 12 is
It is a gaming machine of means 11.
As the change effect, the specific effect executing means displays the specific display by the first aspect (for example, special hold), and then changes the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect (for example, blue hold or red hold).
It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal hold) when the specific display is not changed to (for example, change patterns 31, 32 and 41 (for example) shown in FIGS. 40 (C)). It is possible to execute the hold notice effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in F)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 13 is
It is a gaming machine of means 12,
The specific effect executing means is characterized in that, as a first aspect, a specific display is displayed in a normal mode (for example, a normal hold) (see FIG. 52).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 14 is
It is a gaming machine of means 12,
As the first aspect, the specific effect executing means displays the specific display in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode (for example, the change patterns 31 to 36 and the change patterns 31 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to 40 (E)). When the hold notice effect is executed based on the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold is temporarily displayed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means 12 to 14,
The specific effect executing means is performed by an mode that acts on the specific display displayed by the first aspect (for example, FIGS. 50 (5), 50 (8), 51 (5), and 51 (for example). 8)
It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 acts in the hold notice effect by executing steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in step S8010). Perform the production),
It is possible to execute the action effect a plurality of times for the specific display displayed by the first aspect of No. 1 (for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), the special display is performed at the timing of the first hold shift. After the hold is displayed, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but the special hold does not change, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, from the special hold to the normal hold. It is variable)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means 12 to 15,
When the display mode of the specific display displayed by the third aspect changes to the second aspect, the advantage is higher than when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the first aspect changes to the second aspect ().
For example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change pattern 411,414) in which a red hold is finally displayed even after returning from the special hold to the normal hold is provided, and only when the super reach jackpot is achieved. , Change patterns 411,414 can be determined).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific display displayed by the third aspect.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means 12 to 16.
Limiting means for limiting the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect (for example, in the second embodiment, steps S6005X, S in the effect control microcomputer 100).
A portion for executing 6007X, S6009, and S6010) is provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
Any gaming machine selected from means 11 to 17,
The specific display means has at least a normal mode (for example, "white"), a first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, "red") that suggests the content of the effect. For example, the specific display can be displayed by any of the display modes including the effect suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) (for example, the third mode).
In the embodiment of the above, step S3 in the effect control microcomputer 100.
713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705
S4708, S4711, S4714 execution part),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific embodiment (for example, in the third embodiment, selected in the same process as steps S8010 and S8011 in the effect control microcomputer 100. By executing the same processing as in steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table, a special zone effect, a pseudo-ream, and a super reach effect can be executed).
When the specific display means displays the specific display according to the second specific aspect and then the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is executed (for example, the effect of the suggested content is executed). After 5 seconds), the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is used.
When any one of P02 to P05 is selected as the pending change pattern by executing steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714,
The hold display or active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, which is the second display mode, can be changed to "red", which is the first specific mode).
According to such a configuration, the expectation for a specific aspect can be increased.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-168556 (paragraph 0365-0368, FIG. 43) provides a success pattern in which a change effect of a mode in which a white arrow flies is performed, and if a white arrow is stabbed in a specific display, the pattern changes to a special mode. , It is stated that there is a failure pattern that does not change unless a white arrow sticks in the specific display. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-168556, the change effect becomes monotonous, and there is a possibility that the interest when the change effect is executed cannot be sufficiently improved. Therefore, it is an object of the invention according to the means A1 to A8 to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest when the change effect is executed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is a specific display capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display or an active display). After displaying the specific display by means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first aspect (for example, special hold, which may be normal hold), the display of the specific display. Change effect executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, S8106 to S8114 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that can execute a change effect (for example, a hold notice effect accompanied by an action effect) that changes the mode. The display mode of the specific display includes at least a first mode and a second mode having a high advantage (for example, blue hold, red hold), and the change effect execution means is used as a change effect. After displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect (for example, the change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E). FIG. 41
When the hold notice effect is executed based on the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in (G) to (I), the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold), depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect. Then, after the change effect, the change effect can be executed at a different ratio (for example, if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect but does not change with the special hold, the action effect is executed again after that. It is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, the action effect will not be executed after that). It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the change effect executing means displays the specific display by the first aspect (for example, special hold) as the change effect, and then displays the display mode of the specific display in the second aspect (for example, blue hold). It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal hold) (for example, change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40 (C)) when the display mode is not changed to the third mode (for example, normal hold). And the hold notice effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F) may be executed). According to such a configuration
It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A3) In the means A2, the change effect executing means may be configured to display a specific display in a normal mode (for example, a normal hold) as a first mode (see FIG. 52).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A4) In the means A2, the change effect executing means displays a specific display in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode (for example, FIGS. 40 (C) to 40 (C) to
When the hold notice effect is executed based on the change patterns 31 to 36 shown in (E) and the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold may be temporarily displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A2 to the means A4, the change effect executing means is executed by the mode that acts on the specific display displayed by the first aspect (for example, FIG. 50 (5) or It is possible to execute a change effect including the effect effect of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 50 (8), 51 (5), and 51 (8) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is the process selected in step S8010). By executing steps S8013 and S8105 according to the table, the action effect can be executed a plurality of times for the specific display displayed by the first aspect of 1 (for example, the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect). In the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but the change remains as the special hold. Instead, the action effect may be executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold may be changed to the normal hold). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A6) In any of the means A2 to the means A5, when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the third aspect changes to the second aspect, the display of the specific display displayed by the first aspect is displayed. It has a higher advantage than the case where the aspect changes to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern in which a red hold is finally displayed even after returning from the special hold to the normal hold (change pattern 411,). 414) is provided, and only when it becomes a super reach jackpot
The change pattern 411,414 can be determined). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific display displayed by the third aspect.

(Means A7) In any of the means A2 to the means A6, the limiting means for limiting the number of specific displays displayed by the third aspect (for example, in the second embodiment, in the effect control microcomputer 100). Steps S6005X, S6007X, S6009,
It may be configured to include a portion that executes S6010). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game when the change effect is executed.

(Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to the means A7, the specific display means has at least a normal mode (for example, "white") and a first specific mode (for example, "for example") having a higher expectation than the normal mode. "Red") and a second specific mode suggesting the content of the effect (for example, an effect suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)). The specific display can be displayed depending on the display mode (for example, in the third embodiment, in the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S3713, S3717, S372).
1, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4
Step S8010 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the third embodiment, for example, in the third embodiment, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect (part for executing 714). A specific display means provided with a special zone effect, a pseudo-ream, and a super reach effect) by executing the same process as steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in the same process as S8011. Is when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is executed after the specific display is displayed by the second specific aspect (for example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed). In addition, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is set in steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, By executing S4714
When any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or the active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, which is the second display mode, is changed to "red", which is the first specific mode. It may be configured to be variable to). According to such a configuration, the expectation for a specific aspect can be increased.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a CPU in a main board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contents of a symbol specification command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contents of a variable category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the production process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result specification command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold notice effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol change start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the action production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the action production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change of a production symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the hold notice effect setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a hold change pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a selection ratio of red hold. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change timing determination lottery table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery table. (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol change in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the 2nd special suggestion mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the 2nd special suggestion mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold display and active display in each effect mode which a player can select. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution ratio of the hold notice effect in each effect mode. It is a time chart which shows the specific example of the effect executed in each effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be executed only in a lightning mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be executed in a sunny mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be executed in the rain mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be executed in a lightning mode.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a gaming frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame consists of a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, and a mechanical plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached.
It is a structure including (not shown) and various parts (excluding the game board 6 described later) attached to them.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 3,
A surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 3 and a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball are provided. Further, on the back surface of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 is used.
Is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game ball can flow down is formed.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. In the stick controller 122, a player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and presses and pulls the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 125 (FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 121 or the like. 3) is built-in. Also, the stick controller 122
A tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the plate. Also, stick controller 1
22 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. Push button 1
20 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be set to either the left or right of the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special Design display 8
When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching with the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are exchanged. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 9c for which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized with each other. What is synchronization?
It means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is from 0 to
It is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying the number 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers are 0 to 9), but
The types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8
b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved storages is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result is to finally stop and display the symbol (example of identification information).

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball is opened to the second starting winning opening 14.
It becomes possible to win a prize (it becomes easier to win a start prize), and it becomes an advantageous state for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening may be further narrowed. By arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the 1st start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the 1st starting winning opening 13, the winning rate of the 2nd starting winning opening 14 It may be set higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second hold storage number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory. ) Is provided, and a first special symbol hold storage display 18a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started,
Reduce the number of lit indicators by 1.

Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first reserved storage display unit 9a for displaying the first reserved storage number and a second reserved storage display unit 9b for displaying the second reserved storage number. .. note that,
Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, instead of the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b, it is the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. An area (total hold storage display unit) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) may be provided.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b.
Variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. again,
The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. Specific game state that occurs when is derived and displayed (
By controlling the opening / closing plate to the open state by the solenoid 21 in the big hit game state), the big winning opening which is the winning area becomes the open state. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying a number from 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a rectangular shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, and is, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 1
The variable display of the display of 0 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by 1. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by 1. Furthermore, the probability change state is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state). Then, the probability that the stopped symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Further, even in a time-saving state (a game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a probable change state but the fluctuation time of the symbol is shortened, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. again,
Four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided in the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, the first
If the variable display of the special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the variable display of the special symbol ends.
The first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the game state is shifted to the high probability state (probability change state), and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, the special symbol display 8a).
, 8b and the effect display device 9 are controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display is easily satisfied), and the game state is shifted to the high base state (in this embodiment, the time is shortened).
Also, when the gaming state is changed to the reduced working hours state, it is also changed to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a start prize.

It should be noted that instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the process shifts to a normal symbol probability change state in which the probability that the stopped symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. Ordinary symbol display 1
When the stop symbol at 0 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning state becomes easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the starting prize is easily won (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the variation of the special symbol or the effect symbol starts. It can be done more frequently (in other words, the reserved memory is digested faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. Main board 3
1 is equipped with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. Game control microcomputer 5
The 60 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, ROM 54 and R
The AM55 is built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also has a built-in random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by a hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or the whole thereof is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied).
Is stored in part or all of the contents of the RAM 55. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the main board 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. Random number circuit 50
In 3, the numerical data is updated according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and at the time of starting winning, which occurs at random timing. Has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random number value based on the fact that is at the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

Further, the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, and the second start port switch 14a
An input driver circuit 58 that gives a detection signal from the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, the main board also includes an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, and a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying ordinary symbols.
The display control of the first special symbol holding storage display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

It should be noted that the terminal board 1 outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state.
An information output circuit 64 that outputs information to an external device such as a hall computer via the 60 is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. It receives the effect control command and controls the display of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and also controls the display of the frame LED 28, and the audio output board 7
The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via 0.

As will be described later, the effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 included in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 124 included in the push button 120. But(
(See FIG. 3) and FIG. 2 are not shown.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by the power supply. Production control board 8
At 0, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (effect control INT) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and the VR is there.
Map AM. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP109 is CG in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101.
Read image data from ROM. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit,
For example, diodes and transistors are used. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is the trigger button 12 of the stick controller 122.
An operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to 1 is detected is input from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. In addition, the effect control CPU 1
01 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. .. In addition, the effect control CPU 1
01 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is the lamp driver board 3 via the output port 105.
A signal for driving the LED is output for 5. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the voice output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on the signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice or a sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined effect period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, C)
The PU56) executes the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, and then starts the main process after step S1. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1).
Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). And the initialization of the built-in device (
After performing initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) (step S4), the RAM is set to an accessible state (step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte:) output by the built-in device are used.
The address synthesized from the least significant bit 0) is the mode indicating the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6).
.. When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not in the ON state, check whether the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, the processing when the power supply is stopped such as the addition of parity data) is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 uses the backup RAM.
The data of the area is checked (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (match).
become. If the check result is not normal, the data in the backup RAM area is
It means that it is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialization data for areas that may be initialized in the work area are set in the backup setting table. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the area where the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) and the output state of the output port are saved (the area where the output state of the output port is saved.
Output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, etc.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit, or miss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44).
Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may try to do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the variable time timer that was being timed out timed out
Furthermore, the symbol confirmation specification command described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

The CPU 56 does not always send the display result specification command when the power is restored.
First, it may be confirmed whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0. Then, if the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the variable time timer is 0, the power is changing during the power failure. It may be determined that the state has not been reached and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and the display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during the power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside, and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10).
By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a game control microcomputer 56) for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted).
It is also a command indicating that 0 has executed the initialization process. ) Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 performs the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S) in the main process.
18) is repeatedly executed. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (ordinary symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one round (also called the game device control process).
The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, whether or not the power cutoff signal is output (
A power failure detection process for detecting (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power supply cutoff signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power failure detection process, the CPU 56
When it detects that a power cutoff signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing::
Step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. Execute a display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 (step S22).
.. For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23).
). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24, S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the large winning opening in a predetermined order. C
The PU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14
Depending on the winning detection based on either a or the count switch 23 being turned on,
A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 is an RA corresponding to the output state of the output port.
The contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the M region are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (the special symbol display control process). Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “×”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach". A variation pattern of reach PA1-2 is prepared. Of these, the non-reach PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that is not accompanied by reach and is not accompanied by pseudo-ream or slip effect, and is a fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation that is not shortened fluctuation (in this example, the fluctuation time is 12.50 seconds). Is. Also, non-reach P
A1-2 is a fluctuation pattern without reach and without pseudo-ream or slip effect, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern for shortened fluctuation (in this example, the fluctuation time is 2.00 seconds). Is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, in the case of non-reach loss, the case where the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream or the slip effect is not included is shown, but in the case of non-reach loss. Also, it may be configured to provide a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-ream or a slip effect.

Further, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2 and normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are used. , Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2, and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, the normal PB
When 2-1 is used, the revariation is performed once. In addition, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-2 is used, the re-variation is 2
It is done once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 are used, the re-variation is performed three times.
Note that the re-variation is to temporarily stop the effect symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then execute the variable display of the effect symbol again. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the normal PA2-3 to the normal PA2-4 and the normal PB2 are used. -3 ~ Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 ~ Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 ~ Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 ~ Special PG
Variation patterns of 1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are prepared. Note that FIG. 6
In the above, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and accompanied by the effect of a pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-3 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-4 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, which is used in the case of a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit and is accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect, is re-variated once.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) (for determining the jackpot type).
(2) Random 2 (MR2): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the ordinary symbol hit determination random number (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random 2, random 3) or random numbers for initial value (random 5). In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (game control microcomputer 5) is used as a random number for determining a big hit.
It may be 60 external hardware. ) Generates a random number. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of the hardware random number.

FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot judgment table is R
It is a collection of data stored in the OM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with a random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a time saving state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state. Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

8 (B) and 8 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. (For the second special design).
Each numerical value shown in FIG. 8 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in FIG. 8 (C) in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 8A. If any of the jackpot determination values is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for big hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8 (A) is the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.
Is shown. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C), a small hit determination table (
When using the 1st special symbol), the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300, while when using the small hit determination table (2nd special symbol), the rate is 1/3000. Will explain the case where it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as "small hit" is high.

8 (D) and 8 (E) show the jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54.
, 131b is an explanatory diagram. Of these, in FIG. 8D, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13
Jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 13 when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on winning a prize (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed)
1a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b set the jackpot type to "normal jackpot" or "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining either "probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), five determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability change jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 1 judgment value is assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type judgment table 131b (1/40 ratio). (Suddenly determined to be a probabilistic jackpot).
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the rate of being determined as "sudden probability change jackpot" is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability variation jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (that is,). , "Sudden probability change jackpot" may be determined only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), there are "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden change jackpot" as jackpot types. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
Although the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 10-round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 7-round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot types are three types of "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden variation jackpot" is shown, but the case is not limited to the three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. On the contrary, the number of jackpot types may be less than three, and for example, only two types may be provided as jackpot types.

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts only to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state ends (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even before the end of the variation display a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted and the time is shortened. Migrate. See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (step S132).
reference).

Further, the "sudden change big hit" is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened less than the "normal big hit" and the "probability change big hit" (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit to be done. That is, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal jackpot" and "probability big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, while in "sudden change jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win a prize at the big prize opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden end of the probabilistic jackpot gaming state, the probabilistic state is shifted to the probabilistic state (in this embodiment, the probabilistic state is changed and the time saving state is also changed. Step S169, which will be described later. See S170). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).
..

The mode of the sudden change jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times the big winning opening is opened may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as the normal big hit or the sudden change big hit, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be extremely short to 0.1 seconds.

In this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as in the big hit game state by the "sudden probability change big hit" is performed. Will be.
Then, in the case of a "small hit", the gaming state does not change after the two opening of the large winning opening is completed, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so
It makes it impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden change big hit" or a "small hit", and improves the interest of the game. If all the big hit types are configured to be probabilistic big hits, it is not necessary to provide small hits. In addition, when the jackpot type is configured to provide a small hit when all the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, the sudden probability variable jackpot is only shifted to the probabilistic change state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). (The opening pattern of the big winning opening is also the same for the sudden change big hit and the small hit).

The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and are judgment values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" (big hit type judgment value). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type to be the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

9 (A) to 9 (C) are explanatory views showing fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C for big hits. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is set to a random number for the variation pattern type determination according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on (random number 2).

In each big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A to 132C, the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination is the normal CA3.
Judgment values corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of -1 to normal CA3-2, super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 are set.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9 (A) used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot” and FIG. 9 (B) used when the jackpot type is “probability variation jackpot”. The allocation of the determination values for the variation pattern types of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3 is different between the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in the above.

In this way, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 1 selected according to the jackpot type.
Comparing 32A to 132C, the assignment of the determination value for each variation pattern type is different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, judgment values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used, and the ratios determined for the same variation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the value of a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type. Is 1
If it is 50 to 251 it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

In addition, for the super reach jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type with pseudo-ream (super PA)
It is divided into 3-3, fluctuation pattern types including fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern types without pseudo-ream (variation pattern types including fluctuation patterns of Super PB3-3 and Super PB3-4). May be good. In this case, in both the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal jackpot and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and the super reach and pseudo-ream are used. The fluctuation pattern type that does not accompany it will be assigned.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation jackpot", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation jackpot". A judgment value is assigned to a fluctuation pattern type to which a judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden change big hit" and the sudden probability change big hit state is controlled, it is different from the case of controlling to the normal big hit or the big hit state by the probability change big hit. It can be determined by the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern type determination table 132D for small hits. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D sets the variation pattern type to a random number for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol.
It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on random 2). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is decided to make a small hit, a case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the fluctuation pattern type is shown. ..

10 (A) to 10 (C) show the deviation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C.
It is explanatory drawing which shows. Of these, FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern type determination table 1 for loss, which is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3.
It shows 35A. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135 for loss, which is used when the game state is the normal state and the total pending storage number is 3 or more.
B is shown. Further, FIG. 10C shows the deviation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state. The deviation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set the variation pattern type to a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is an outlier symbol.
) Is a table referenced to determine one of multiple types.

In each of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B for deviation, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern type is a non-reach CA2.
-1 ~ Non-reach CA2-2, Normal CA2-3 ~ Normal CA2-4, Super CA2
A judgment value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of -5 is set.

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game is out of order and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. When is 230 to 251 it can be seen that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game is out of order and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. If is 1 to 89, the fluctuation display of normal fluctuation is executed at least without reach (without effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages (non-reach CA2-1). As shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, the variation pattern of the non-reach normal variation is the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1). With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (variable pattern type determination table 135A, 135B for loss) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (variable pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved storage number, second reserved storage number, total reserved storage number) stored by the reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer) for a part. Common judgment value (1 in the example shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B)
~ 89) is configured to be assigned. In addition, as shown in this embodiment, the "variable display pattern other than the variable display pattern for reach" means that, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect. It is a variable display pattern (variable pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

11 (A) and 11 (B) are explanatory views showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. Hit fluctuation pattern judgment table 137A-13
In 7B, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", a random number (random 3) for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type. Based on this, it is a table referred to to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. The fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B for each are selected as the tables to be used according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for the variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when the determination to make the variable display result "out of order" is made. A table referenced to determine the variation pattern to one of several types. Outlier fluctuation pattern judgment table 138A
Is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

13 and 14 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6 is given a unique number, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 is commanded by command 8.
Upon receiving 0XX (H), the effect display device 9 is controlled to start variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of the big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is the second
This is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of a special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation designation command). The variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 920
0 (H) is an effect control command (H) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed.
Power failure recovery designation command). When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send the command.

The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is used depending on the type of jackpot. In particular,"
In the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot", the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H))
) Is used, and in the case of "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to send a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable change big hit start designation when it is a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Further, A2XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the big hit game by "normal big hit" or "probability variable big hit". Command A302 (H) is
This is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. note that,
The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to send an ending designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. ..

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability change state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been decremented by 1. Command C300 (H) is
This is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, the effect control command (first) indicating that the reserved storage number has increased or decreased for the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively.
The case of sending the hold storage number addition specification command, the second hold storage number addition specification command, the first hold storage number subtraction specification command, and the second hold storage number subtraction specification command) is shown, but the form of the hold storage information is , Not limited to those shown in this embodiment, for example, the reserved storage information in the following aspects may be transmitted.

(1) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, and in that one command, which of the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage is increased is specified, and the increased number of reserved storages is specified. (1st hold storage number or 2nd hold storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, and in that one command, which of the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage is increased is specified, and the total number of reserved storages is EXT data. It may be set as and sent.

(3) As the reserved storage information, it is specified which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has started winning (whether the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage has increased). In addition to sending the effect control command (first start winning prize designation command, second start winning designation command), a hold storage number designation command that specifies the number of hold storages is sent separately, and the hold storage number designation command is used. The total number of pending storages may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As the reserved storage information, it is specified which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has started winning (whether the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage has increased). In addition to sending the effect control command (1st start winning prize designation command, 2nd start winning designation command), a hold storage number designation command for specifying the hold storage number is sent separately, and the hold storage number designation command is used. The increased number of reserved storages (first reserved storage number or second reserved storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, command C4X
X (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained, whether or not a small hit is obtained, and a judgment result of the type of the big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (judgment result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of winning. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 22) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is obtained, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. , It is determined which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type falls within. Then, a value that specifies a big hit or a small hit or a value that specifies the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 1
Controls transmission to 00. In addition, a value that specifies a range of judgment values as a judgment result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and the effect control microcomputer 100
Controls the transmission to. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big hit. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, EXT is performed according to whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit.
The data is set and the symbol specification command is sent.

For example, if it is determined to be "out of place" in the prize-winning effect processing described later,
The CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "normal big hit", C
The PU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, if it is determined that the result is a "probability change jackpot", CP
The U56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, if it is determined that a "sudden change jackpot" will occur, C
The PU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 5
6 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the data to be read when setting the symbol specification command and when setting the display result specification command.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. Figure 1
As shown in 6 and 17, in this embodiment, which game state is used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variable pattern type at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data according to whether the value is determined to be in the range of any determination value, and the variable category command is transmitted.

For example, if it is determined that the gaming state is normal and out of order at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 89. Judge whether or not. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 is in the range of the determination values 1 to 89 regardless of the total number of reserved storages.
Since the variation pattern types of are commonly assigned, the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. can do. Then CP
When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the U56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 adds "" to the EXT data.
A variable category 3 command in which "02 (H)" is set is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 adds "03" to the EXT data.
(H) ”is set to send the variable category 4 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 adds "04 (H)" to the EXT data.
) ”Is set, and a variable category 5 command is sent. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 displays "05 (H)" in the EXT data.
Send the variable category 6 command for which is set. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA2-5 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is Super CA2-5 based on the reception of the variation category 7 command.

It should be noted that the threshold value 89, which is used to determine which of the above fluctuation categories it belongs to,
Specifically, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the deviation pattern variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. It was derived by picking up the possible values. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 8 to 9, 21 to 29, and FIGS. 9 (A) to 9 (D) show.
And, the threshold value used for the category determination is derived by picking up the values that can be the boundaries of the range of the determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 10 (C).

Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probable change state or a time-saving state and is out of alignment at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not it becomes ~ 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-2), the CPU 56 sets "07 (H)" in the EXT data. Send a category 8 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets "08 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of Super CA2-5). Send a variable category 9 command.

Even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state, the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA2-5 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2-5 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when the process of step S232 of the process of the winning effect, which will be described later, is executed, if it is out of order, a common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for the game state determination process in step S226.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Is determined. The value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 74.
(That is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA3-1), CP
The U56 transmits a variable category 21 command in which "10 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, the CPU 56 sets "11 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). The variable category 22 command is sent. Next, the CPU 56 determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, Super C).
In the case of the variation pattern type of A3-3), the variation category 23 command in which "12 (H)" is set in the EXT data is transmitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "probability variation jackpot" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Is determined. The value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 38.
(That is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA3-1), CP
The U56 transmits a variable category 24 command in which "13 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, the CPU 56 determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (
That is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA3-2), "
14 (H) ”is set to send the variable category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56
When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, Super CA3)
In the case of the variation pattern type of -3), the variation category 26 command in which "15 (H)" is set in the EXT data is transmitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a sudden probability change big hit is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. To judge. The value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 1.
When it becomes 00 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of special CA4-1), CP
The U56 transmits a variable category 27 command in which "16 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2), the CPU 56 adds "17 () to the EXT data.
H) ”is set to send the variable category 28 command.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variable category 29 command in which "18 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

In addition, since the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the winning judgment is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the fluctuation indicated by the winning judgment result specification command is used. It may happen that the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, at least non-reach CA2-1,
As for the fluctuation pattern types of Super CA2-5 and Super CA3-3, common judgment values are assigned regardless of the total number of pending storages (see FIGS. 9 and 10). There is no inconsistency with the variation pattern type of the variation display executed in. Therefore, in this embodiment, a hold notice effect, which is a kind of look-ahead notice effect, is executed based on the winning determination result that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, or super CA3-3. To. In addition, non-reach CA2-1, super CA
FIG. 1 only when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern type is 2-5 and Super CA3-3.
6 and the variation category commands shown in FIG. 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, variation category 7 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) are transmitted, and the winning determination of other variation pattern types is performed. In the case of the result, the variable category command may not be sent. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning that the command is other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. good.

The "look-ahead notice effect" is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the execution of the hold notice effect, which is a kind of look-ahead notice effect, is determined when the start prize is generated, the hold display is displayed in a normal mode (in this example, a white circle display). A hold notice effect that is finally changed to a special display mode different from that (in this example, a blue or red circle display) is executed. In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the hold display is a special display mode (in this example, a triangle display or a rectangular display). In some cases, the effect effect is executed at the timing of the subsequent hold shift, and the hold display to be announced is changed to one of the special display modes. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as "normal hold", and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as "special hold". Further, the hold display displayed by the blue display color in the special display mode is also referred to as "blue hold", and the hold display displayed by the red display color is also referred to as "red hold".

The mode of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and in addition to the hold notice effect, for example, as a look-ahead notice effect, a special display result such as a chance pattern symbol is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. Various modes such as performing an effect of stopping and displaying, performing an effect of counting down over multiple fluctuations, and executing an effect of changing the effect mode in such a way that the background screen changes. Can be considered.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect is executed so that only the display mode of the hold display can be changed is shown. For example, the variable display currently being executed is performed by the display mode that inherits the display mode of the hold display. In a gaming machine that is configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to, even if the hold display is exhausted and the variable display of the notice target is being executed, the display mode of the active display can also be changed. It may be configured.

The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14. do.

18 and 19 show the game control microcomputer 56 mounted on the main board 31.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol process process (step S26) executed by 0 (specifically, CPU 56). As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 is the first start winning opening 1
If the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in 3 is turned on, that is, if the start prize to the first start prize opening 13 has occurred, the process of passing the first start port switch has occurred. Is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, the CPU 56 has generated a start winning in the second start winning opening 14. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, steps S300 to S3
Perform any of the 10 processes. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the storage number (total pending storage number) of the numerical data stored in the holding storage buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (
Variable display time: The time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is determined to be the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the control is performed to transmit the fluctuation pattern command according to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Processing during special symbol change (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 100. Controls the transmission of the specified command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S30.
Update to the value corresponding to 8 (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S30.
Update to the value corresponding to 0 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stopped symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, control is performed to send a command indicating that the large winning opening is open to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the processing during opening of the large winning opening is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the large winning opening open designation command, a different large winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a command (A101 (H)) for designating the round 1 is transmitted, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is executed. Is transmitted a command (A10A (H)) for designating the round 10 while the large winning opening is open.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a flag indicating the game status (
For example, a process of setting a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the big prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Of these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the process of passing the first start port switch in step S312. Further, FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the process of passing the second start port switch in step S314.

First, the process of passing the first start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (A). In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first 1
It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the hold storage number is 4) (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Then CPU5
Section 6 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (random number for determining a big hit) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a big hit type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern. The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation. A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for determination of fluctuation pattern (random number 3) are stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A as it is. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A).
If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize-winning effect process is executed in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 issues a symbol designation command based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer 1
Control to transmit to 00 (step S1218A) and control to transmit a variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1219A).
.. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

By executing the processes of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the first start winning opening 13 is started and the winning effect process of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variable category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processes of steps S1218A to S1220A are executed, the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is generated and the winning effect processing of step S1217A is executed, the symbol is designated. A set of three commands, a command, a variable category command, and a first hold storage number addition designation command, is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

However, if the winning effect processing of step S1217A is not executed due to the determination of Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first reserved storage number addition designation command in step S1220A. Is performed, and the control to send the winning judgment result specification command (design specification command, variable category command) is not performed. It should be noted that when the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed, the winning determination result is specified by setting a value (for example, "FF (H)") indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified as EXT data. You may send a command (design specification command, variable category command).

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step S1215A,
When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the winning effect process of step S1217A is executed only when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed and there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, only when it is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, step S121
The effect processing at the time of winning 7A is executed. In addition, step S only in the case of a big hit game state.
Do not shift to 1217A, and if it is in a small hit game state, step S1217A
It may be possible to shift to and execute the effect processing at the time of winning.

Further, in this embodiment, the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is controlled so that the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the big hit is started. We are in a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the big hit is finished. Specifically, from the big winning opening pre-opening process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process process.
The process up to is being executed.

Next, the process of passing the second start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (B). In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Then CPU5
Section 6 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (random number for determining a big hit) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a big hit type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern. The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect effect process at the time of winning (step S1218B).
Controls to send variable category commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 (
Step S1219B). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

By executing the processes of steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start prize is entered into the second start winning opening 14 and the prize-winning effect process of step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variable category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processing of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is generated and the winning effect processing of step S1217B is executed, the symbol is designated. A set of three commands, a command, a variable category command, and a second hold storage number addition designation command, is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A is performed, and if the time saving state (including the case where the time saving state is controlled together with the probability change state), the winning effect processing in step S1217B is executed. You may not do it. That is, the winning effect processing in step S1217B may be executed only in the normal state, and the symbol designation command and the variable category command may be transmitted. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
As will be described later, since the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed only for the second reserved memory when the time is shortened, conversely, the winning effect process of step S1217B is executed only when the time is shortened to specify the symbol. The command and the variable category command may be transmitted, and in the normal state, the symbol designation command and the variable category command may not be transmitted without executing the winning effect processing in step S1217B.

Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the big hit game is in progress. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect processing in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .. With such a configuration, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed for a certain period of time, it is possible to reliably prevent the pre-reading notice effect from being interrupted in the middle due to a short fluctuation time.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first steps S1214A, S121.
The big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in 4B is compared with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 8A, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning a prize at the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started. By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern type is. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as will be described later, the effect control microcomputer is based on the judgment result at the time of winning. A hold notice effect for notifying that a big hit or a super reach will occur during the variable display of the effect symbol by 100 is executed.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 is set with a probability change flag indicating that the game state is a high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the big hit determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. 8 (A).
It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the gaming state has changed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the variation start). If a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before, the normal state may change to the probabilistic state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the start winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 has the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. 8 (B). ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when the CPU 56 has a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217A), the CPU 56 has a small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. 8 (B). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in (for special symbol). Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217B), FIG. 8 (C).
) Shown in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), it is determined whether or not the small hit determination value matches.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (step S22).
N) of 3), the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “off” to the symbol designation command (step S224).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225).
In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state (specifically, whether or not the probabilistic change flag and the time saving flag are set). Is determined. It should be noted that, from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not the state is in the probable change state and whether or not the time is shortened, a plurality of variables are displayed between the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the time is shortened and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, if a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probabilistic state). Therefore, the game state determined in step S225 at the start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (step S6 described later).
1) does not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the start winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for disengagement according to the determination result in step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program that performs threshold value determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of any determination value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variable category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

For example, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a probable change state or a time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 will perform in step S232 described later.
It is determined whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 219 or less, and if the threshold value is 219 or less (that is, 1 to 219), "07 (H)" is used as the EXT data of the variation category command. ) ”Is determined (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 219 or less (that is, 220 to 251), the variable category command EXT
It is determined that "08 (H)" is set as the data (see FIG. 16).

Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 89 or less, and when the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 89). Is "00 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command.
Is determined (see FIG. 16). Further, when the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90).
If it is ~ 99), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100).
In the case of ~ 169), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). Also, when the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 17).
(When it is 0 to 199), "03 (H)" is used as the EXT data of the variable category command.
Is determined (see FIG. 16). Further, when the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, 2).
In the case of 00 to 214), "04 (H)" is used as the EXT data of the variable category command.
Is determined (see FIG. 16). Also, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is,).
In the case of 215 to 229), "05 (H)" is used as the EXT data of the variable category command.
) ”Is determined (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (that is, 230 to 251), "06 (that is, if it is 230 to 251)" is used as the EXT data of the variable category command.
It is determined that "H)" is set (see FIG. 16).

In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, 89, 99, and 169 are in order from the smallest threshold value.
Since the determinations are 199, 214, and 229, what is determined by the threshold value of the later order does not fall within the range below the threshold value of the previous order. That is, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 99 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, 1 is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order.
It does not fall within the range of ~ 89, and it is determined whether or not it is within the range of 90 to 99. Further, in this embodiment, 89, 99, 169, 199 are arranged in ascending order of the threshold value.
, 214 and 229 are shown, but conversely, 229, 2 in descending order.
It may be determined as 14, 199, 169, 99 and 89. This also applies to the case where the determination using the other threshold values shown below is performed.

It should be noted that the threshold value in the normal state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, at least the range of judgment values is standardized for the fluctuation pattern type that is "non-reach out" and the fluctuation pattern type that is "super reach out", so that "non-reach" is used. It is possible to determine whether or not it is "off" or "out of super reach".

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (step S22)
Y) of 3), the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating that it is a “small hit” in the symbol designation command (step S227).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and is described in step S2, which will be described later.
In 32, it is determined that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251), and it is determined that "18 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command. (See FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data "18 (H)" is set as it is without performing the threshold value determination.

When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as shown in FIG. 8D when there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217A). (For special symbols) Using 131a, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot",
It is determined whether it is a "probability change jackpot" or a "sudden change jackpot". Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E). Using 131b, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden variation jackpot".

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 determines that the EXT data "01 (H) is a" normal jackpot ".
) ”Is performed in the symbol specification command. Further, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 is the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained.
Is set in the symbol specification command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 determines the EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is obtained.
) ”Is performed in the symbol specification command.

Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for the jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step S229 (step S231).

For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it determines that it is a "normal jackpot". In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 74 or less, and if the threshold value is 74 or less (that is, 1 to 74). Is the EXT data of the variable category command "10 (
It is determined that "H)" is set (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), the EXT data of the variable category command is "11 (that is, 75 to 149).
It is determined that "H)" is set (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 149 or less (that is, 150 to 251), the EXT data of the variable category command is "12."
(H) ”is determined to be set (see FIG. 17).

Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that it is a "probability variation jackpot", the threshold values 38 and 7
Set 9. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 38 or less, and if the threshold value is 38 or less (that is, 1 to 38). Is "1" as the EXT data of the variable category command.
3 (H) ”is determined to be set (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), the EXT data of the variable category command is "14 (that is, 39 to 79).
It is determined that "H)" is set (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), the EXT data of the variable category command is "15 (H).
) ”Is determined (see FIG. 17).

Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability change big hit", the CPU 56 sets a threshold value 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 100 or less, and when the threshold value is 100 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 100). Is the EXT data of the variable category command "
It is determined that "16 (H)" is set (see FIG. 17). Also, if the threshold is not 100 or less (
That is, in the case of 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold values set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B.
) To determine which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within (step S232).

In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set, and the variation pattern type set in step S232 is set. Using the judgment table,
The range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type may be determined may be determined.

Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 has "00 (H)" to "08 (H)" and "10" as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”” to “18 (H)” are set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

In this embodiment, even if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the winning determination, the case where the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. If it is determined that the hit is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a symbol designation command indicating that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variable category command comprehensively indicating that the variable pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. .. Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is not shown to be a specific variation pattern type, but is comprehensively shown to be one of the jackpot variation pattern types. Based on receiving a category command
The hold notice effect described later may be executed.

23 and 24 show a special symbol normal process (step S) in the special symbol process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 300). In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage counter is checked. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demo designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and processing is performed. finish. For example, CP
When the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted in step S51A, the U56 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after the customer waiting demo specification command is transmitted, the customer waits again based on the fact that the customer wait demo specification command sent flag is set. You can control not to send the demo specification command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag may be reset when the next change display of the special symbol is started.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step S53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

In this embodiment, the first step is performed by executing the processes of steps S52 to S54.
The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 1
It may be configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order of winning a prize in 4.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 22, a random number for determining a big hit (random R) is used. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot judgment value in the low probability state is executed.
It may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probabilistic state (specifically, only the process of step S220 may be executed and the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, between the jackpot determination result in the winning determination and the jackpot determination result at the actual start of variation. It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, C
When the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the PU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, the CPU 56 is the RAM 5 when the special symbol pointer indicates "first".
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of 5, corresponds to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Store in the storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Therefore, each first
The order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number (or the second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the second reserved storage number). ) = 1
, 2, 3, 4 are in order.

Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probability change state background designation command when the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set and the probability change flag is not set. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the normal state background designation command if neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set.

Specifically, when the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (previously set in the ROM for each command) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to the pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). note that,
In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background specification command, the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the hold storage number subtraction specification command (reserved storage number subtraction specification command) are used for each timer interrupt.
The command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the order of the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command). Specifically, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background specification command is first transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, the display result specification command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and further 4 m.
After s has elapsed, the hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. When the special symbol variation is started, the symbol variation specification command (first symbol variation specification command, second symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (random number for big hit determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is in step S1214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S12 of the second start port switch pass process.
The big hit determination random number extracted by 14B and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer is read, and the big hit determination is performed. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for big hit judgment, and executes a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probable change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is in the non-probability change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is probablely changed between the probability change jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (step S61), step S7
Move to 1. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation as to whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the gaming state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" or a "sudden change jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game is completed, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the process of determining the small hit is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and if the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", FIG. 8 (
The small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in B) is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. .. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, step S7 as it is.
Move to 5.

In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S7).
2). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer indicates "first".
The jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D is selected. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table and uses the type (random number 1) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for the jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area.
“Normal jackpot”, “probability change jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”) is determined as the type of jackpot (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 is extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S1214B of the second start port switch pass process, and is the first.
The random number for determining the jackpot type stored in advance in the hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer is read, and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of suddenly changing jackpots is high.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot".
In the case of, "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "sudden probability change jackpot", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, any one of the jackpot symbols "1", "3", and "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly probable jackpot", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when it is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, if it is determined to be a "probability change jackpot", "7" is determined as a stop symbol of a special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown, but the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is this. It is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, if a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type is prepared in advance and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. It may be configured so that the type is also determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

FIG. 25 shows a variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 1 as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types.
Select any of 32C (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) (step S92). and,
The process proceeds to step S100.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9 (D)) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S95). The time saving flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state or the time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is finished. Specifically, if it is decided to be a "normal jackpot",
The time saving flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the reset is performed when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) is completed. Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, even if the next big hit occurs,
The time saving flag is reset. Further, when it is decided to make a "probability change big hit" or a "sudden change big hit", the probability change flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storage is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 determines the deviation pattern type determination table 135A (N) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. (See FIG. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, step S
Move to 100.

When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 is a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types, and is a variation pattern type determination table for loss. Select 135B (see FIG. 10B) (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state or the time saving state (in this embodiment, when the probabilistic state is changed, the time saving state is always set. Is also migrated (see steps S169 and S170), so step S9
When it is determined to be Y in 5, there are cases where it is controlled only in the probabilistic state and the time saving state), and the CPU 56 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, the deviation pattern type determination table 135C (FIG. 10 (C)).
) Is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed and the gaming state is the normal state and the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the deviation variation shown in FIG. 10B is shown. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the deviation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2-2 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-2 is determined, the variation is performed in the process of step S102. Non-reach PA1-2 of shortened variation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a time saving state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortened fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in a probable change state or a time saving state (see FIG. 10C) and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages (FIG. 10 (C)). Although the case where the table is different from 10 (B)) is shown, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation.

Next, the CPU 56 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer), and steps S92.
, S94, S97, S98 or S99, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process (step S100).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the table as a table used to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100.
Select either the hit variation pattern determination table 137A or 137B (see FIG. 11) or the loss variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) (step S101).
.. Further, by reading random 3 (random number for determining variation pattern) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer) and referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101, the variation pattern Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (random number for determining the variation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 is a random number counter for determining the variation pattern for generating the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3). The value may be directly extracted from the random number value, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. Also, CPU5
6 is an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern.
Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation production control commands (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designated command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" is specifically determined by the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing being "01".
It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. Further, when the type of the jackpot is "probability variation jackpot", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, whether or not it is a "probability variation jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "02" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. .. And when it is neither "normal jackpot" nor "probability jackpot" (that is, when it is "suddenly variable jackpot"), the CPU
56 controls the transmission of the display result 4 designated command (step S115).

On the other hand, the CPU 56 is in the case where the jackpot flag is not set (step S110).
N), it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to send the display result 5 designated command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (step S1)
In the case of N) of 16), that is, if it is out of alignment, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S118).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted (). Step S1121). Whether or not the hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, step S1 described later.
When the hold storage number subtraction specification command is transmitted in 122, the hold storage number subtraction specification command indicating that the hold storage number subtraction specification command is transmitted is set so that the transmitted flag is set, and in step S1121, the hold storage number subtraction specification is specified. It suffices to confirm whether the command sent flag is set. Also, in this case, the set hold storage number subtraction specification command sent flag should be reset by the special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing described later when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated or the jackpot is terminated. Just do it.

Next, if the hold storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 controls to send the hold storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 is set to the second.
Controls the transmission of the hold storage number subtraction specification command.

Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). and,
The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, has a probability variation flag indicating that it is in a probability variation state, a time reduction flag indicating that it is in a time reduction state, and the number of variable times of the special symbol in the time reduction state. The time reduction counter indicating the above is reset (step S132), and control is performed to send a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133).
Specifically, when the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is sudden change big hit, small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (command A002)
H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). Judgment is based on.

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability change big hit" and 2 times in the case of "sudden change big hit") is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step S13).
5). In addition, the round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) (step S136).

If the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of variable times of the special symbol in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, CPU5
In step 6, the value of the time reduction counter is set to -1 (step S138). And the CPU 56
When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the time reduction flag is reset (step S140).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sends the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100.
) Is transmitted (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2) is displayed on the counter for the number of times the large winning opening is opened.
Times) is set (step S144). In addition, the opening time for each large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, it is the same as the round time of the sudden change jackpot 0.1
Seconds are set as the opening time per big winning opening in a small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161) and control is performed to send the jackpot end designation command (step S162). Here, in the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot", the jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and "
If it is a sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is terminated.

In step S164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164).
.. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot ending this time is a normal jackpot (step S166). In addition, whether or not it is a "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. .. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 presses the time reduction counter for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10).
0 times) is set (step S168).

If it is not a normal jackpot (ie, if it is a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot), CP
The U56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (step S169), and sets the time reduction flag to shift to the time reduction state (step S170).

Then, the CPU 56 processes the value of the special symbol process flag in the special symbol normal process (step S).
It is updated to the value corresponding to 300) (step S171).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU
56 performs a process of setting or updating the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (step S3202). In this case, C
The PU56 is a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer.
Set or update the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (step S22).
(See) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display 8a, 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, so that the special symbol display 8a,
The variable display of the special symbol in 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Performs the process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (step S).
3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. Production control CPU 1
01 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, R
Initialization processing is performed for clearing the AM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining an effect control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S).
703), the following effect control process is executed.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705).
). In the effect control process processing, the current control state (of each process according to the control state)
The display control of the effect display device 9 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the effect control process flag).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S706).
). In the fourth symbol process process, the current control state (of each process according to the control state)
The process corresponding to the fourth symbol process flag) is selected, and the display control of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S707). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is the reception command buffer 1
It is composed of up to 12 12-byte areas. Then, a command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception count counter is 0
It takes a value of ~ 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

33 to 35 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step S621)
), The effect control CPU 101 stores the received symbol designation command in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S622).
).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step S6)
23) The effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (23). Step S624).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step S6)
25) The effect control CPU 101 issues the received first hold storage number addition designation command to RA.
It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and the variable category command are stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in M (step S62).
6). However, when the game state is in the probability change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state, or the small hit game state, the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted, and only the first hold storage number addition designation command is transmitted. In some cases (steps S1215A to S1219A)
(Refer to), in that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first hold storage number addition designation command in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. ..

Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display unit 9a according to the normal mode (white circle display in this example), and the first hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a. The storage number display is updated (step S627). In addition, the effect control CPU 101
Sets the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM to 1.
Add (step S628).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number addition designation command (step S6)
29) The effect control CPU 101 issues the received second hold storage number addition designation command to RA.
It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and the variable category command are stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in M (step S63).
0).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b according to the normal mode (white circle display in this example), and the second hold in the second hold storage display unit 9b. The storage number display is updated (step S631). In addition, the effect control CPU 101
Set the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM to 1.
Add (step S632).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction specification command (step S6)
33) The effect control CPU 101 erases one hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a, shifts the remaining hold display one by one, and has the first hold storage number in the first hold storage display unit 9a. The display is updated (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 101 is a RAM.
The value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in is subtracted by 1.
Step S635).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction specification command (step S6)
36) The effect control CPU 101 erases one hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b, shifts the remaining hold display one by one, and has a second hold storage number in the second hold storage display unit 9b. The display is updated (step S637). Further, the effect control CPU 101 is a RAM.
The value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in is subtracted by 1.
Step S638).

If the received effect control command is a normal state background specification command (step S639)
The effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a blue display color) according to the normal state (step S640). Further, if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the time saving state flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state is reset (step S641).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state background specification command (step S642)
The effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a green display color) according to the time saving state (step S643). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (step S644). Further, if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the probability change state flag indicating that the game state is the probability change state is reset (step S645).

If the received effect control command is a probability change state background specification command (step S646)
The effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a red display color) according to the probability change state (step S647). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change state flag (step S648).

If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S649)
, The effect control CPU 101 sets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag (step S650). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 sets the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (step S652).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 may use the effect control CPU 101.
A flag corresponding to the received effect control command is set (step S653). for example,
If the received effect control command is a jackpot start specification command, the jackpot start specification command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is a jackpot end specification command, the jackpot end specification command reception flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 36 shows the effect control process process (step S7) in the main process shown in FIG. 31.
It is a flowchart which shows 05). In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 10
First, 1 first executes a hold notice effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of a hold notice effect and a change pattern (step S800A).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 is set in step S according to the value of the effect control process flag.
Any one of 800 to S807 is performed. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control so that variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is processed during the effect symbol change (step S802).
Update to the value corresponding to.

Process during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing and the like of each change state (change rate) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S).
Update to the value corresponding to 803).

Effect symbol change stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the change of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is displayed in the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (step S800).
Update to the value corresponding to.

Jackpot display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a jackpot. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Round processing (step S805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

Round post-processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is processed during the round (step S8).
Update to the value corresponding to 05).

Jackpot end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect setting process (step S800A). In the hold notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first receives one set of start winning commands (that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition designation command). Alternatively, it is confirmed whether or not a new set) of the second hold storage number addition designation command) has been received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of symbol specification command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition specification command (first hold storage number addition specification command or second hold storage number addition specification command) is displayed in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S6002). If the probabilistic state flag or the time saving state flag is set (ie,
If it is in a probable change state or a time saving state), the process ends as it is.

If neither the probabilistic state flag nor the time saving state flag is set (ie,
(In the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 is newly received a hold storage number addition designation command (a hold storage number addition designation command newly stored in the start winning command storage area).
It is confirmed whether or not is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step S6003). Unless the first hold storage number addition designation command is newly received (that is, the second hold storage number addition designation command is newly received), the process is terminated as it is.

By executing the processes of steps S6002 and S6003, in this embodiment, only when a new start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 occurs while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The processing after step S6004 is executed, and the hold notice effect can be executed.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, the hold notice effect can be executed even when the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs while the probabilistic change state or the time saving state is controlled. It may be configured in.

Further, for example, in the case of configuring to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the gaming state is the normal state.
It is possible to execute the hold notice effect regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and regardless of whether the starting prize is for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It may be configured as.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more (step S6004). Whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more is determined by, for example, the first.
It can be determined by checking the first reserved storage number stored in the reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635). If the first reserved storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first reserved storage number is 1), the process is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold display is started in the normal manner at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display is changed to special hold, blue hold, or red hold at the timing of the hold shift. However, the fact that the first hold storage number is only 1 at the timing of the start winning means that when the hold shift of the first hold storage is performed after that, the hold is immediately exhausted and the variable display is performed. Therefore, there is no room to execute the hold notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined that the hold notice effect cannot be executed unless the first hold storage number is 2 or more in step S6004, and the process is terminated as it is.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, in the case of configuring to display the blue hold or the red hold immediately at the timing of the start winning and to start the execution of the hold notice effect, the first hold storage. Even if the number is 1, the process may be shifted to the process after step S6005 so that the hold notice effect can be executed.

Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to display an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed by a display mode inheriting the display mode of the hold display, the active display is displayed after the hold notice effect is executed. Since it is also possible to change the display mode, even if the first reserved storage number is 1, the process may be shifted to the process after step S6005 so that the reserved notice effect can be executed.

If the first hold storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the latest hold display based on the latest variable category command received and the first hold storage number (step S6005). .. In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 is
The final display mode determination table for determining the final display mode of the latest hold display is selected based on the latest variable category command and the first hold storage number. And C for production control
The PU 101 uses the selected final display mode determination table to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine the final display mode of the latest hold display.

38 and 39 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. Figure 3
As shown in 8 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, in the final display mode determination table, the final display mode of the hold display is normal hold (without special hold), normal hold (with special hold), and blue hold. , And red hold are assigned judgment values, respectively.
Of these, "normal hold (via special hold)" means that after changing to special hold at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, it will finally be changed to normal hold at the timing of the subsequent hold shift. It is a return, and the final display mode itself is usually on hold, but the hold notice effect is executed. On the other hand, "normal hold (without going through special hold)" does not change to special hold at all, and does not change as normal hold until the hold is exhausted and the hold display is erased, and the hold notice is given. It corresponds to the one that does not execute the production itself.

If the first hold storage number is 2, there is only one opportunity to change the hold display at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, so there is room to change the hold display to special hold once. do not have. Therefore, in the final display mode determination table for the first hold storage number "2" shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C), only for normal hold (without passing through special hold), blue hold, and red hold. , Judgment values are assigned to each, and there is no allocation of judgment values for normal hold (via special hold).

In addition, when the hold display is configured to be changeable multiple times during one variable display or the active display is configured to be displayable, even if the first hold storage number is 2. The special hold may be configured to be visible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, when the variable category indicated by the variable category command is out of reach, out of super reach, or a super reach jackpot, the hold notice effect can be executed. If it is configured and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is another variation category, the effect control CPU 1
01 determines that the final display mode of the hold display is "normal hold (without passing through special hold)" as it is, and decides not to execute the hold notice effect.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) of the effect control CPU 101 is "2", the variable category indicated by the variable category command is not. If it indicates a reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), select the final display mode determination table for two pending and non-reach loss shown in FIG. 38 (A), and the variation indicated by the variation category command. If the category indicates a super reach loss (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), select the final display mode determination table for two hold and super reach loss shown in FIG. 38 (B), and use the variable category command. The variable categories shown indicate super reach jackpots (variable categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17).
), The final display mode determination table for two pending and super reach jackpots shown in FIG. 38 (C) is selected. Further, in the effect control CPU 101, the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is "3" or "4".
In the case of, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), 3 to 4 pending categories and non-reach loss shown in FIG. 39 (D). If the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates an out-of-super reach (variable category 7 shown in FIG. 16), the pending 3 to 4 shown in FIG. 39 (E) are selected. If the final display mode determination table for individual and super reach loss is selected and the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates a super reach jackpot (variable categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), FIG. 39 (F). ) Is selected, and the final display mode determination table for 3 to 4 hold and super reach jackpot is selected. and,
The effect control CPU 101 uses the selected final display mode determination table to perform lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot, a blue hold is finally performed rather than a normal hold, as compared with a case of a non-reach loss. The rate of change to red hold is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the degree of expectation for super reach (reach reliability) is higher than the case where the hold display is finally changed to normal hold. It's getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the result is bluer than the normal hold as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to hold or red hold is high. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the case of a super reach jackpot in this embodiment,
Compared to the case of non-reach off or super reach off, the rate of change to red hold is higher than that of blue hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display of the notice target finally changes to red hold, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the highest, and when it finally changes to blue hold, the next big hit. The expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) is high, and the expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) is the lowest when the game is finally put on hold.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, there is a case where the hold notice effect can be executed when the winning determination result is a non-reach loss, a super reach loss, and a super reach jackpot. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when there is a variable category that can be specified to be normal reach, the hold notice effect may be executed based on the fact that the winning determination result is out of normal reach or a normal reach jackpot.

When it is decided not to execute the hold notice effect (N in step S6006), that is, when it is decided to hold normally (without passing through special hold) as the final display mode, or when the variable category indicates a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot. If it is not the one, the process is terminated as it is. When it is decided to execute the hold notice effect (Y in step S6006)
), The effect control CPU 101 determines the change pattern of the hold display to be announced based on the latest received variable category command, the first hold storage number, and the final display mode (step S6007). In step S6007, the effect control CPU 101 selects a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the hold display to be announced based on the latest change category command, the first hold storage number, and the final display mode. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected change pattern determination table, and determines the change pattern of the hold display to be notified.

40 and 41 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table. In addition, in FIGS. 40 and 41, the special Δ indicates the special hold of the triangle display, and the special □
Indicates a special hold for rectangular display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) of the effect control CPU 101 is "2", the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue. If it is on hold, select the two hold and change pattern determination table for blue hold shown in FIG. 40 (A), and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, it is shown in FIG. 40 (B). Select the change pattern determination table for 2 hold and red hold.

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for two hold and blue hold so that the change pattern 21 is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 40B, determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for two hold and red hold so that the change pattern 22 is determined with a probability of 100%.
The change pattern 21 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as a normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue hold at the timing of the hold shift. Further, the change pattern 22 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red hold at the timing of the hold shift. That is, the fact that the first hold storage number is "2" means that the hold shift timing is 1.
Since there is only turning, it is changed to blue hold or red hold in the final display mode as it is at the timing of the hold shift without going through the special hold.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is a first reserved storage number storage area (steps S628, S6).
When the first reserved storage number stored in (see 35) is "3", step S600
If the final display mode determined in 5 is normal hold (via special hold), the three hold and change pattern determination table for normal hold shown in FIG. 40 (C) are selected, and the final display determined in step S6005 is selected. If the mode is blue hold, the three hold shown in FIG. 40 (D) and the change pattern determination table for blue hold are selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, FIG. 40 (E). ) Is selected, and the change pattern determination table for holding 3 and red holding is selected.

As shown in FIG. 40 (C), determination values are assigned to the change pattern 31 and the change pattern 32 in the change pattern determination table for three hold and normal hold. The change pattern 31 is 1 after displaying the hold display to be announced as normal hold at the time of starting prize.
This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the second hold shift. Further, in the change pattern 32, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed as a normal hold at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the normal hold again at the timing of the shift.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), determination values are assigned to the change pattern 33 and the change pattern 34 in the change pattern determination table for three hold and blue hold, respectively. The change pattern 33 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and changes the hold display of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to blue hold at the timing. Further, the change pattern 34 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to blue hold at the timing of the shift.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), determination values are assigned to the change pattern 35 and the change pattern 36 in the change pattern determination table for three hold and red hold, respectively. The change pattern 35 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and changes the hold display of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to red hold at the timing. Further, the change pattern 36 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to red hold at the timing of the shift.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is a first reserved storage number storage area (steps S628, S6).
When the first reserved storage number stored in (see 35) is "4", step S600
If the final display mode determined in 5 is normal hold (via special hold), the four hold and change pattern determination table for normal hold shown in FIG. 41 (F) are selected, and the final display determined in step S6005 is selected. If the embodiment is blue hold, the four hold and change pattern determination table for blue hold shown in FIG. 41 (G) are selected. Further, if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is reserved in red, the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates non-reach off or super reach off (variable category 1 or variable category 7 shown in FIG. 16). ), Select the change pattern determination table for 4 hold and non-reach off / super reach off and red hold shown in FIG. 41 (H), and the change category indicated by the change category command indicates a super reach jackpot. If it is (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), the change pattern determination table for four hold, super reach jackpot and red hold shown in FIG. 41 (I) is selected.

As shown in FIG. 41 (F), the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 403, and the change pattern 4 are included in the change pattern determination table for four hold and normal hold.
Judgment values are assigned to 04. The change pattern 401 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and changes the hold display of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 402 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 403 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 404 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and the second hold. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third hold shift.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (G), the change pattern determination table for the four hold and the blue hold has determination values for the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, and the change pattern 408, respectively. Allocated. The change pattern 405 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and changes the hold display of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 406 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 407 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and the second hold. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 408 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and the second hold. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), a change pattern determination table for 4 hold and non-reach off / super reach off and red hold, and 4 hold and super reach jackpot and red hold. In the change pattern determination table, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, the change pattern 412, the change pattern 413, and the change pattern 414, respectively.

The change pattern 409 is 1 after displaying the hold display to be announced as normal hold at the time of starting prize.
At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display, at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to red hold, and at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that displays the hold display of the notice target as it is in red hold. Further, the change pattern 410 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 411 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed again in the normal hold at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Also, the change pattern 41
In 2, after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to red hold and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. again,
The change pattern 413 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, 2
This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 414 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning, and the second hold. It is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed again in the normal hold at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red hold at the timing of the third hold shift.

As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, when the first reserved storage number is “4”,
At the time of starting prize, the hold display of the notice target is displayed as normal hold, changed to special hold at the timing of the first hold shift, normal hold or blue hold at the timing of the third and subsequent hold shifts,
It is configured to be variable to red hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display to be announced is displayed at the fourth position (state after the start winning) on the first hold storage display unit 9a, it is displayed at the third position. When is (the state after the first hold shift), the hold display to be announced does not change from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, or the red hold. Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to 40 (E), in this embodiment, the first reserved storage number is “3”.
Even in the case of, since the hold display of the notice target is displayed as a normal hold at the time of the start prize, when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the third position in the first hold storage display unit 9a (start prize). In the later state), the hold display to be announced does not change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is difficult for the hold display of the notice target to change from the special hold to the normal hold during the period when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth and third positions. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by changing the hold display of the notice target from the special hold to the normal hold at an early stage, and to prevent the effect of the hold notice effect from being reduced when the hold notice effect is executed. ..

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, the special hold, the blue hold, and the red hold can be displayed immediately at the start winning, or the special hold is displayed without waiting for the next hold shift. Immediately execute the action effect described later, from special hold to normal hold or blue hold,
By configuring it so that it can be changed to red hold, even during the period when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the 4th or 3rd position, the hold display of the notice target is normally held from the special hold. It may be configured so that it can be changed to blue hold, blue hold, or red hold. However, even in this configuration, at least the hold display for notice is changed from special hold to normal hold during the period when the hold display for notice is displayed at the 4th or 3rd position. It is preferable to configure it so that the rate of change is low.

Further, in this embodiment, the action effect described later can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and even if the action effect is executed, the hold display to be announced does not change as the special hold. Or it may change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold.
For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift from the special hold. Can be changed to normal hold. Further, for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift. The special hold does not change, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. As such, in this embodiment, not only the case where one action effect returns from the special hold to the normal hold, but also the case where a plurality of action effects are executed and the special hold returns to the normal hold. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the hold notice effect is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to 40 (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to 41 (I), in this embodiment, there are two types of special hold, a special hold of triangle display and a special hold of rectangular display. However, when the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed, the ratio of the red hold being displayed as the final display mode is higher than the case where the special hold of the triangle display is displayed. .. On the contrary, when the special hold of the triangle display is displayed, the ratio of returning to the normal hold as the final display mode is higher than that of the case where the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), in this embodiment, even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold, the red hold is finally displayed (that is, it is disappointing once the normal hold is returned). After making it look like the red hold is restored and displayed) Change pattern (change pattern 41)
1,414) is provided, and a determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 411,414 of this revival pattern can be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the red hold is finally reached after returning from the special hold to the normal hold, the jackpot will be confirmed, as compared with the case where the special hold is simply changed to the red hold. ,
Expectations (reliability) for big hits are high.

It should be noted that the change pattern 411,414 of the revival pattern can be determined with a low probability even if the change pattern of the revival pattern is 411,414, and even if the super reach is lost. May be. At least, even in such a configuration, if the special hold returns to the normal hold and then finally becomes the red hold, the jackpot is better than the case where the special hold simply changes to the red hold. Expectation (reliability)
Should be high.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the change patterns 411 and 414 of the revival pattern are provided only when the final display mode is the red hold is shown, but the same revival is also shown when the final display mode is the blue hold. It may be configured to provide a pattern change pattern.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), the winning judgment result is non-reach loss / super reach loss or super reach hit only when the number of hold is 4 and the red hold is changed. Although a case where a different change pattern determination table is used depending on whether or not the above is used is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, hold 2 shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (E).
The change pattern determination table for 3 pieces or 3 hold, and the change pattern determination table for 4 hold and normal hold or blue hold shown in FIGS. 41 (F) and 41 (G) also have different changes depending on the judgment result at the time of winning. It may be configured to use a pattern determination table. In this case, for example, when the change pattern of the revival pattern is provided even when the final display mode is held in blue as described above, the non-reach is lost / super according to the mode similar to FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I). It is configured to provide a change pattern determination table for reach loss and a change pattern determination table for super reach jackpot, and if the special hold returns to normal hold and then finally becomes blue hold, it will be called a jackpot. It may be configured so that it is confirmed that it will be, or the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

Further, it may be further subdivided so that a change pattern determination table for non-reach loss and a change pattern determination table for super reach loss are separately provided.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (H), as a change pattern determination table for four hold and red hold, a table common to the case of non-reach loss and the case of super reach loss. Although the case of using is shown, it may be configured to use different change pattern determination tables depending on the case of non-reach loss and the case of super reach loss.

Further, the example of the change pattern shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 is an example, and various change patterns may be provided. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the case where the normal hold is changed to the special hold at the timing of the first hold shift is shown, but the special hold is displayed from the timing of the start winning, and the second and subsequent hold shifts are displayed. A change pattern for changing from a normal hold to a special hold may be provided at the timing of the hold shift. Further, for example, a change pattern may be provided so as to change to a blue hold and then to a red hold.

Further, in FIGS. 40 and 41, the case where only the change pattern in which either the special hold of the triangle display or the rectangular display is displayed is provided, but for example, the special hold of the triangle display is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display. Or, a change pattern may be provided such that the special hold of the rectangular display is changed to the special hold of the triangular display.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the final display mode and the change pattern determined in steps S6005 and S6007 in the hold notice effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM in association with the hold storage of the notice target (step). S6008). In this embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed in parallel for a plurality of hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a, and the first hold storage display unit 9a has a maximum of the hold notice effect. Since four hold displays can be displayed, four storage areas are provided in the hold notice effect setting information storage area, and the final display mode and change pattern are stored in association with each hold storage. ..

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 36. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S81).
2). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).
) Is updated (step S813).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 36. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 is set to step S80.
The display result (stop symbol) of the effect symbol is determined according to the data stored in the variable pattern command read in 00 and the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) (step S8001). .. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 has a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step S8001. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result specification command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 is stopped. As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols is determined. If the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 3 specification command), the effect control CPU.
101 determines the combination of the production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols.

If the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the combination of the effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other.
Determine the stop symbol of the production symbol. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of being in a probabilistic state (odd number symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it will not be in a probabilistic state (even symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probability variation symbol. Also called.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S8002). If neither the probabilistic state flag nor the time saving state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CP
U101 confirms whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S8003). If the first symbol change specification command reception flag is set (
That is, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started), the process proceeds to step S8004. That is, in this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, the hold notice effect is executed for the first hold storage, so that step S
By executing the processes of 8002 and S8003, the processes of steps S8004 to S8010 are executed only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the hold display to be notified is displayed. It is changed to a special hold, and the action effect is configured to be executable.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a special hold display timing in the first hold storage (step S8004). Whether or not there is a special hold display timing is determined by, for example, the hold notice effect setting information storage area (
Judgment is made by confirming the change pattern stored in step S6008) and confirming whether or not there is a normal hold → special △ or special □ at the timing of the current fluctuation start (hold shift). can. If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display, which is the special hold display timing, to the special hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a (step S8005). .. In this case, if the change pattern is normal hold → special △, change to triangle display special hold, and if normal hold → special □, change to rectangular display special hold.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 becomes the executeable timing of the action effect (execution in a mode that acts on the hold display and suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes) in the first hold storage. It is confirmed whether or not there is something (step S8006). Whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect is determined by, for example, checking the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008) and determining the start of this change (hold shift). Special △ → Special △, Special △ → Normal hold, Special △ →
Blue hold, special △ → red hold, special □ → special □, special □ → normal hold, special □ → blue hold,
Special □ → Red It can be judged by checking whether there is something on hold.

The execution timing of the action effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and the action effect may be configured to be executable at other timings. For example, even when the normal hold is changed to the special hold, it may be determined that the action effect can be executed, and the process after step S8007 may be executed so that the action effect can be executed. Further, for example, it may be configured to provide a dedicated action effect when changing from a normal hold to a special hold, and when this dedicated action effect is executed but does not change to the special hold (gase action effect). It may be configured to have.

If there is a timing in which the action effect can be executed in the first hold memory, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display as an action effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the action effect. A table according to the embodiment is selected (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected action effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the effect effect (step S8008).

In this embodiment, since the hold notice effect can be executed in parallel for the plurality of hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a, the action effect is provided in the first hold storage. It may happen that there are multiple things that can be executed at the same time. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the effect effect with priority given to the first reserved storage that is the timing at which the effect effect can be executed and the variable display is started first. It is controlled so that the action effect is executed only once during one fluctuation display. For example, the first
When the first and third hold displays displayed on the hold storage display unit 9a are the execution timings of the action effect, first, the presence / absence of the action effect and the presence / absence of the action effect for the first hold display. When the type is determined and it is decided to execute the action effect, the action effect is executed only for the first hold display.

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, by executing the action effect at different times, it may be configured so that the action effect can be executed a plurality of times during one variation display. Further, although the action effect is executed only once during one variable display, the action effect is executed in such a manner that the one action effect acts on a plurality of hold displays at the same time. May be good.

45 and 46 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the action effect determination table. The effect control CPU 101 selects the action effect effect determination table for the special Δ → normal hold shown in FIG. 45 (A) at the timing of changing from the special hold of the triangle display to the normal hold based on the change pattern. Also, if it is the timing to change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the normal hold,
Special □ shown in FIG. 45 (B) → Select the action effect determination table for normal hold. Further, if the timing does not change from the special hold of the triangle display to the special hold of the triangle display as it is, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → special Δ shown in FIG. 45 (C) is selected. Further, if the timing does not change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the special hold of the rectangular display as it is, the action effect determination table for the special □ → special □ shown in FIG. 45 (D) is selected. Further, when the timing changes from the special hold of the triangle display to the blue hold, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → blue hold shown in FIG. 46 (E) is selected. Further, when the timing changes from the special hold of the rectangular display to the blue hold, the action effect determination table for the special □ → blue hold shown in FIG. 46 (F) is selected. Further, when the timing changes from the special hold of the triangle display to the red hold, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → red hold shown in FIG. 46 (G) is selected. Further, if the timing changes from the special hold of the rectangular display to the red hold, FIG. 46 (H).
Special □ shown in □ → Select the action effect determination table for red hold.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, determination values are assigned to the action effect determination table for no action effect, action effect A, action effect B, and action effect C, respectively. In this embodiment, there are three types of action effects A to C as the types of action effects, but the present invention is not limited to such modes, and for example, only two types of action effects are used. It may be configured or configured to use four or more types of action effects.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in this embodiment, when the action effect A is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of change from the special hold to the normal hold is high. Further, when the action effect B is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the special hold that does not change is high. Further, when the action effect C is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of change from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold is high.

The action effect determination table shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) is a table used when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, and is a pattern that lowers the display mode of the hold display to one with a low degree of expectation. Although it is a table for selecting, the action effect A is a pattern action effect that lowers the display mode of the hold display to one with a low degree of expectation because the selection ratio of the action effect A is particularly high. It can be said (Pattern 1). Further, the action effect determination table shown in FIGS. 45 (C) and 45 (D) is a table used when the special hold remains unchanged, and is a table for selecting a pattern for maintaining the display mode of the hold display as it is. Even though there is
In particular, since the selection ratio of the action effect B is high, it can be said that the action effect B is an action effect of a pattern that maintains the display mode of the hold display as it is (Pattern 2). In addition, from FIG. 46 (E)
The action effect determination table shown in (H) is a table used when the special hold is changed to a blue hold or a red hold, and is used to select a pattern that raises the display mode of the hold display to a high expectation. Even though it is a table, it can be said that the action effect C is an action effect of a pattern that raises the display mode of the hold display to a high expectation because the selection ratio of the action effect C is particularly high (Pattern 3). ..

Since the above-mentioned patterns 1 and 2 are intended to reduce or maintain the display mode of the hold display, they are patterns for making the change fail as an action effect, and the above-mentioned pattern 3 is the display of the hold display. Since it establishes an aspect, it is a pattern to make the change look successful as an action effect. It should be noted that even if the pattern is to make the same change appear to be unsuccessful, the appearance of the action effect may be different between the above pattern 1 and the pattern 2. For example, when the action effect according to the above pattern 1 is executed, a character such as "great failure" is displayed, and when the action effect according to the above pattern 2 is executed, a character such as "failure" is displayed. It may be displayed differently.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the presence / absence of the action effect and the determination ratio of the type are different depending on which display mode the reserved display changes in the current variable display. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, regardless of the change mode of the variable display this time, the presence / absence of the action effect and the determination ratio of the type may be different depending on which final display mode the reserved display changes to.

In addition, for example, the presence / absence of action effect and the determination ratio of the type may be different depending on the display result of the variation display of the notice target (for example, whether or not it is a big hit) and the variation category (for example, the presence / absence or type of reach). It may be configured as.

Further, for example, when the display mode of the hold display is configured to change from the blue hold to the red hold, the action effect can be executed even if the change display does not change in the blue hold. You may.

In addition, even if the display mode of the hold display is configured to change from blue hold to red hold as described above, even if the same special hold changes to blue hold in this variable display. , The execution ratio and type of the action effect may be different depending on whether the final display mode is blue hold or red hold. For example, it may be configured to execute the action effect at a higher rate when the final display mode is red hold, or to execute the action effect (for example, the action effect C) having a high degree of expectation. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured to execute the action effect at a higher rate when the final display mode is blue hold, or to execute the action effect with high expectation (for example, the action effect C). .. With such a configuration, not only is there a sense of expectation as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display will change in the variable display executed this time, but also whether the display mode of the hold display may change thereafter. On the other hand, you can have a sense of expectation.

When it is decided to execute the action effect (Y in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and the type of action effect determined in step S8008 (step S8010). .. Then, step S801
Move to 2.

On the other hand, when the probability change state flag or the time saving state flag is set (step S80).
In Y) of 02, when the reception flag of the first symbol variation designation command is not set (N in step S8003), when there is no action effect executable timing in the first hold storage (N). In step S8006 N) or when it is decided not to execute the action effect (N in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 is a normal process table (process table without action effect) according to the fluctuation pattern. Select (
Step S8011). Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8010 and S8011 (step S).
8012).

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and controls to display the effect symbol in the mode of variation set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, a advance notice effect (so-called advance notice effect for the change) other than the pre-reading advance notice effect (in this example, the hold advance notice effect) may be configured to be executable during the change display of the effect symbol. When it is decided to execute the effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the determined advance notice effect in steps S8010 and S8011.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1,
Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the lamp control execution data 1 and the sound number data 1) (step S8013). .. For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. From multiple types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to
You may choose the variation pattern to use.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8014).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area for the start winning command (symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition). Of the specified command or the second reserved storage number addition specification command)), one of the commands at the time of starting prize stored in the first storage area is deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted (. Step S8015).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8016).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the process of changing the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 101 is
First, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step S8101), and the value of the variable time timer is subtracted by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8).
104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S810).
5).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the action effect is being executed and the end timing of the action effect is reached (step S8106). Specifically, whether or not it is the end timing of the action effect can be determined by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8014. If it is the end timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 has a hold display of the advance notice target in blue based on the change pattern stored in the hold advance notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is confirmed whether or not it is the timing to change to the red hold (step S8107).
If it is time to change to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display to be announced to blue hold or red hold. (Step S8108).

If it is not the timing to change to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU1
01 confirms whether or not the hold display of the notice target is the change timing to the normal hold based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008) (step). S8109). If the change timing to the normal hold is reached, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display to be announced to the normal hold (step S8110).

Next, even if the effect control CPU 101 is not at the end timing of the action effect,
Whether or not there is a change timing to blue hold or red hold among other hold storages based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). Confirm (step S8111). Then, if there is a change timing to blue hold or red hold (Y in step S8111),
The effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display to be announced to blue hold or red hold (step S8112). That is, in this embodiment, it may be determined that the action effect is not executed even if the variable display is changed from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). ), Even if the action effect is not executed, the hold display that is the timing of changing from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold is controlled to be changed to the blue hold or the red hold.

Next, even if the effect control CPU 101 is not at the end timing of the action effect,
Based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), it is confirmed whether or not there is any other hold storage that has a change timing to the normal hold (see step S6008). Step S8113). Then, if there is a change timing to the normal hold (Y in step S8113), the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the display mode of the hold display to be announced in the first hold storage display unit 9a. (Step S8114). That is, in this embodiment, it may be determined not to execute the action effect even if the variable display is the change timing from the special hold to the normal hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). Even when the effect is not executed, control is performed to change the hold display, which is the timing for changing from the special hold to the normal hold, to the normal hold.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S8).
It is updated to the value corresponding to 03) (step S8116).

FIG. 49 shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU101
First, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, step S8302
The process proceeds to step S8305 without executing the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol of.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbols (missing symbols, jackpot symbols) (step S8302).

Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off-target symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303).
The effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (big hit start designation command reception flag). Small hit /
It can be determined by checking whether or not the flag (small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received is set. If any of the jackpot start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). The effect control CPU 101 is
If the jackpot start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the set flag is reset.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is displayed in the jackpot display process (step S80).
The value is updated according to 4) (step S8310).

If it is decided not to make a big hit or a small hit (step S8)
N) of 303, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8311).
).

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the hold notice effect will be described. 50 and 51 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect. Of these, FIG. 50 shows an effect mode of the hold notice effect when the hold display of the notice target finally changes to red hold. again,
FIG. 51 shows an effect mode of the hold notice effect when the hold display of the notice target finally returns to the normal hold. In addition, in FIGS. 50 and 51, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

First, with reference to FIG. 50, an effect mode of the hold notice effect when the hold display of the notice target finally changes to red hold will be described. As shown in FIG. 50 (1), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 while the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. In this example, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in a state where the first reserved storage number is 3, and the first reserved storage number is increased to 4, and the normal hold is increased by 1 in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. It is assumed that it was made to do. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be red hold, and the change pattern 410 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 50 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangular display based on the change pattern 410 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 50 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 410, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), a character B appears as an action effect B, and an effect in which the character B throws a ball toward a special hold is executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (6),
Even when the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the hold display to be notified does not change as a special hold based on the change pattern 410. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 50 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 410, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect C (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the action effect C is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), a character C appears as the action effect C, and an effect in which the character C throws a ball toward a special hold is executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (9),
At the end timing of the action effect C, the hold display of the advance notice changes from the special hold to the red hold based on the change pattern 410 (see steps S8107 and S8108).

In the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the special hold of the triangle display is displayed as the special hold is shown, but when the change pattern for displaying the special hold of the rectangular display is determined, the case is determined.
In FIGS. 50 (3) to 50 (8), the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the red hold is displayed as the final display mode is shown, but when the change pattern for displaying the blue hold is determined as the final display mode, FIG. 50 ( In 9), the special hold changes to the blue hold.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, an effect mode of the hold notice effect when the hold display of the notice target finally returns to the normal hold will be described. As shown in FIG. 51 (1), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 while the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. In this example, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in a state where the first reserved storage number is 3, and the first reserved storage number is increased to 4, and the normal hold is increased by 1 in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. It is assumed that it was made to do. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (via special hold), and the change pattern 40 is used as the change pattern.
It is assumed that 2 has been decided. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, FIG. 51 (
As shown in 2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 51 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangular display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 51 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), a character B appears as an action effect B, and an effect in which the character B throws a ball toward a special hold is executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (6),
Even when the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the hold display of the notice target does not change as a special hold based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 51 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), a character A appears as the action effect A, and an effect in which the character A throws a ball toward a special hold is executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (9),
At the end timing of the action effect A, the hold display of the advance notice changes from the special hold to the normal hold based on the change pattern 402 (see steps S8109 and S8110).

In the example shown in FIG. 51, the case where the special hold of the triangle display is displayed as the special hold is shown, but when the change pattern for displaying the special hold of the rectangular display is determined, the case is determined.
In FIGS. 51 (3) to 51 (8), the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed.

In the hold notice effect shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the way of showing the action effect may be different depending on which display mode the hold display changes (or does not change). For example, if the hold display remains special hold and does not change, characters such as "failure" are displayed, and if the hold display changes from special hold to normal hold, characters such as "major failure" are displayed. When the hold display changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, characters such as "success" may be displayed.

Further, for example, when the display mode of the hold display is configured to change from the blue hold to the red hold, and the hold display changes from the blue hold to the red hold, a character display such as "success" is displayed. If the hold display changes from special hold to red hold at once, characters such as "great success" may be displayed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific display corresponding to the variable display (holding display in this example) can be displayed, and the specific display corresponds to the first aspect (special holding in this example). After displaying, it is possible to execute a change effect (in this example, a hold notice effect accompanied by an action effect) that changes the display mode of the specific display. Further, as the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the specific display by the first aspect and then changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect (blue hold or red hold in this example) having a high advantage. At the same time, as a change effect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed by the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode (usually in this example). It is possible to execute an effect that changes to (hold).
Then, the specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower rate of changing to the second aspect than the specific display displayed by the first aspect (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, special reservation is performed. The change pattern that changes from to normal hold to red hold is a change pattern 41 that can be selected only when the first hold storage number is 4 at the start winning and the super reach jackpot.
There are only 1,414, and the allocation of judgment values is extremely small, and the change patterns 31, 32, 401 to 404, which normally remain on hold and do not change, have more allocation of judgment values. After changing from special hold to normal hold, it may not change to red hold. ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower advantage than the specific display displayed by the first aspect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 39, special reservation is performed. When changing from to normal hold (in the case of normal hold (via special hold)), the rate of super reach jackpot and super reach loss is lower than in the case of blue hold and red hold, and non-reach is lost. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Specifically, if the first mode (special hold in this example) is continuously displayed even if the action effect of the failure mode is executed in the hold notice effect, the first mode (in this example, the special hold) is continuously displayed. Expectations for (special hold) may decrease, but in this embodiment, the first mode (special hold in this example) changes to the third mode (normal hold in this example). It is possible to increase the expectation for the aspect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is shown as the "specific display displayed by the third aspect", but the hold display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "specific display displayed by the third aspect" is configured to include the one displayed as a normal hold from the beginning without going through the special hold, and even such a normal hold is regarded as a special hold. It may be configured so that the rate of change to blue hold or red hold is lower than that of the other, or the advantage may be lower.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the same normal hold is used, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the expectation is lower and the advantage is lower than when the normal hold is displayed from the beginning. It's getting low.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot expectation and the reach (super reach) expectation are different as the "advantage" is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and the probability variation expectation is configured to be different. May be good.

Further, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode (in this example, a special hold, which may be a normal hold) and the second mode (in this example, a high-advantageous mode). , Blue hold, red hold) and included. As the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect after displaying the specific display by the first aspect, and the change effect is changed according to the execution mode of the executed change effect. It is possible to execute the change effect by a different ratio after the (in this example, if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect but does not change as the special hold, then the action effect is executed again and the special hold is performed. It is possible to change from to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, the action effect is not executed after that). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

In this embodiment, it is shown that when the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold changes to the blue hold or the red hold, the action effect is not executed thereafter. However, it may be configured so that the action effect can be executed at a low rate. As such, "the change effect is executed at a different ratio after the change effect according to the execution mode of the executed change effect" has a subsequent action when the special hold is changed to the blue hold or the red hold. Some of them have a low production rate.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect after displaying the specific display by the first aspect, and the executed change effect. Depending on the execution mode of, the change effect can be executed by a different effect mode after the change effect (in this example, even if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect, the special hold does not change. After that, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, then The action effect is not executed. If the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold does not change, then the action effect is executed again and the special hold changes to the blue hold or the red hold. It may change, and there are many variations in the production mode.) Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect after displaying the specific display by the first aspect, and the executed change effect. Depending on the execution mode, the ratio of which specific display is to be executed after the change effect is different (in this example, when a plurality of special holds are displayed, it acts in the hold notice effect. If the effect is executed and the first special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, then the action effect is executed only for the second and subsequent special holds, and the hold display changes. However, if the first special hold does not change, the action effect is executed for the first special hold after that, and the hold display can be changed). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect after displaying the specific display by the first aspect, and a plurality of types of changes. The effect can be executed (in this example, the action effects A to C can be executed in the hold notice effect), and depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, any kind of change effect is performed after the change effect. The ratio of whether to execute is different (in this example, when the action effect B is executed, the ratio of the effect effect that does not change in the special hold is high, and the action effect is executed after the action effect B does not change in the special hold. In many cases, it changes to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold, so the ratio of action effect A and action effect C increases). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

If the action effect is configured to be executable even after the special hold is changed to the normal hold,
"The ratio of which type of change effect is executed after the change effect differs depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect", for example, in the action effect executed later, the display mode of the hold display. It may include those that are easy to execute the action effect that does not change (the action effect of Gase).

Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after displaying the specific display by the first mode (special hold in this example), the display mode of the specific display has a high advantage in the second mode (this example). Then, it is possible to execute the effect of changing to blue hold or red hold), and as a change effect,
After displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second aspect, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third aspect (normally reserved in this example) is produced. It is feasible. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode according to the execution mode of the change effect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the action effect A is executed in the hold notice effect. When it is done, the rate of change from special hold to normal hold is high). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of the first aspect (in this example, a special hold for displaying a triangle and a special hold for displaying a rectangle), and as a change effect, the first aspect (in this example, a special hold). After displaying the specific display by the method, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second mode (in this example, in this example) having a high advantage.
It is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold), and as a change effect, when the specific display is displayed by the first aspect and then the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second aspect, the specific display is specified. It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the display to the third mode (normally reserved in this example). Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode by a different ratio depending on which type of the first mode the specific display is displayed (in this example, FIG. 3).
As shown in 9 (c), the rate of change from special hold to normal hold is higher when the special hold in triangle display is displayed than when the special hold in rectangular display is displayed). .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the case where there are two types of special reservations (triangle display and rectangular display) having different shapes as the first mode of the plurality of types is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example,
It may be configured to have a plurality of types of hold displays having different display colors (for example, blue or green hold displays). Further, for example, not only the two types of the first aspect (normal hold and special hold) but also three or more types of the first aspect (normal hold and special hold) may be configured.

Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after displaying the specific display by the first mode (special hold in this example), the display mode of the specific display has a high advantage in the second mode (this example). Then, it is possible to execute the effect of changing to blue hold or red hold), and as a change effect,
After displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second aspect, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third aspect (normally reserved in this example) is produced. It is feasible. Then, in a predetermined period, the rate of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low (in this example, in the period in which the hold display to be announced is displayed at the fourth and third positions, the display mode is displayed at the fourth and third positions. It is difficult for the hold display of the notice target to change from the special hold to the normal hold. The hold display of the notice target may not change from the special hold to the normal hold at all.) Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the first aspect, the specific display is displayed by a special aspect (in this example, a special hold) different from the normal aspect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the red hold has the highest expectation (reliability) for the big hit, and the blue hold has the next highest expectation (reliability) for the big hit. The expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be the same between the special hold and the special hold, or the special hold may be configured to have a higher expectation (reliability) for the big hit than the normal hold.

In this embodiment, the special hold is displayed as the first aspect and the normal hold is displayed as the third aspect, and the case where the special hold is changed to the normal hold is shown, but it is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, the normal hold is displayed in the position of the first aspect, and the third
As an aspect, it may be configured to display a completed hold (for example, a circular display including the character display of “done”) indicating that the display mode of the hold display has been changed. Hereinafter, a modification 1 in which the completed hold can be displayed will be described.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect in the modified example 1. note that,
In the first modification, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control C).
The processes executed by PU101) are FIGS. 37 to 41, FIG. 43, FIGS. 45 to 46, and FIG.
In each process and each decision table of 8, the special hold is read as a normal hold, and the normal hold after changing from the special hold is read as a completed hold.

Also in the modification 1 shown in FIG. 52, the allocation to the change pattern that changes from the special hold to the red hold after changing the change patterns 411 and 414 shown in FIG. 41 to the red hold is extremely small, and the change pattern is changed from the finished hold to the red hold. The rate of change to hold is lower than the rate of change from normal hold to red hold, and completed hold has a lower advantage than normal hold.

In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), when the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the effect symbol on the left, middle, and right, a new start prize is generated to the first start winning opening 13. It shall be assumed that it was done. In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in a state where the first reserved storage number is 3, and the first reserved storage number is increased to 4, and the normal holding is normally held in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. It is assumed that the number is increased by one. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be completed hold, and the change pattern 402 (however, the change pattern read as completed hold etc.) is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (3). However, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the notice target remains normal hold and does not change based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the character B appears as the action effect B and the character B throws the ball toward the hold display (normal hold) to be announced, the effect is executed. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, FIG.
As shown in 2 (6), even when the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the hold display of the notice target remains normal hold and does not change based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the character A appears as the action effect A and the character A throws the ball toward the hold display (normal hold) to be announced, the effect is executed. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, FIG.
As shown in 2 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A is reached, the hold display of the advance notice changes from the normal hold to the finished hold based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109, S).
8110).

According to the modification 1 shown in FIG. 52, the specific display is displayed in the normal mode (normal hold) as the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the expression "normal mode (normal hold)" is used, but the normal mode (normal hold) is, for example, a display mode of the hold display displayed when the hold notice effect is executed. Of these, it is the most frequently displayed display mode, and is a display mode that does not suggest the possibility of a big hit or reach, or suggests that the possibility is relatively low.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect is executed so that only the hold display can be changed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to display an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed by a display mode that inherits the display mode of the hold display, the hold display is digested and the variable display to be announced is being executed. Even in the case of, the display mode of the active display may be configured to be changeable. That is, not only when the hold display is configured to be changeable as the specific display, the active display may be configured to be changeable as the specific display. Hereinafter, a modification 2 in which the display mode of the active display can be changed will be described.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect in the modification 2. note that,
In the second modification, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control C).
The processes executed by PU101) are FIGS. 37 to 41, FIG. 43, FIGS. 45 to 46, and FIG.
In each process of 8 and each decision table, a process to display the active display is added, and the same display as normal hold, special hold, blue hold, and red hold can be displayed in the active display, and the display of the active display is displayed. The change pattern may be configured so that the mode can be changed.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 53 (1), when the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the effect symbol on the left, middle, and right, a new start prize is generated to the first start winning opening 13. It shall be assumed that it was done. In this example, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in a state where the first reserved storage number is 2, and the first reserved storage number is increased to 3, and the normal hold is increased by 1 in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. It is assumed that it was made to do. Further, it is assumed that the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with the active display unit 9F, and the active display corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed is displayed on the active display unit 9F. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (via special hold), and the change pattern 402 (however, the change pattern in which the active display is also read as changeable) is used as the change pattern. It shall be decided. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangular display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, the hold storage is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the action effect is performed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), a character B appears as an action effect B, and an effect in which the character B throws a ball toward a special hold is executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (6),
Even when the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the hold display of the notice target does not change as a special hold based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

Next, one of the reserved memories is digested, and as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In addition, based on the fact that the variable display of the notice target has started,
As shown in FIG. 53 (8), an active display having a display mode similar to that of the special hold is displayed on the active display unit 9F in response to the variable display of the notice target currently being executed. In addition, FIG. 53 (8)
In the example shown in, when the variation display is started, it is determined that the action effect can be executed based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action effect, and the type of the action effect is set to the action effect A. (See step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). FIG. 53 (8)
In the example shown in), a character A appears as an action effect A, and an effect in which the character A throws a ball toward an active display having a display mode similar to that of a special hold is executed. There is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), there is a case where the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect.
Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A is reached,
Based on the change pattern 402, the active display having the same display mode as the special hold changes to the active display having the same display mode as the normal hold (see steps S8109 and S8110).
..

When blue or blue display is determined as the final display mode, the active display may change to an active display having the same display mode as blue hold or red hold in FIG. 53 (9).

Further, according to this embodiment, the action effect executed by the mode acting on the specific display displayed by the first aspect (in this example, FIGS. 50 (5), 50 (8), and 51 (5). ), Fig. 5
It is possible to carry out a change effect including the action effect of the aspect shown in 1 (8). In addition, the action effect can be executed a plurality of times for the specific display displayed by the first aspect of 1 (in this example, FIG. 41).
In the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but the change remains as the special hold. Instead, the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and it is possible to change from special hold to normal hold). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the case where the change pattern that can execute the action effect up to two times is provided, but the change pattern that can execute the action effect three times or more is provided. May be good.

Further, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display displayed by the third mode is the second mode.
When the mode is changed, the display mode of the specific display displayed by the first mode is more advantageous than the case where the display mode is changed to the second mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 41, the special hold is changed to the normal mode. Change pattern (change pattern 411,414) in which red hold is finally displayed even after returning to hold
Is provided, and the change pattern 411, 41 is provided only when it becomes a super reach jackpot.
4 can be determined). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific display displayed by the third aspect.

In this embodiment, the case where the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is further changed to the red hold as "the case where the display mode of the specific display displayed by the third mode changes to the second mode". Although shown, not limited to such contents, for example, the hold display that is displayed as a normal hold from the beginning may be configured to have a high advantage even when the hold display changes to a red hold.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the final display mode and change pattern of the hold display are determined at the time of starting winning, and then the presence / absence and type of the action effect are determined for each variable display. I can't be limited. For example, without using a change pattern, for each variation display,
It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of the action effect each time, and also determine whether or not to change from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, or the red hold.

Embodiment 2.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the other hold display is changed from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is exhausted. It may be configured to limit things. Hereinafter, a second embodiment that restricts the change from the special hold to the normal hold will be described.

In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the portion different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect setting process (step S800A) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in the hold notice effect setting process, the first
In addition to the processing shown in the embodiment of the above, the processing of steps S6009 and S6010 is executed. In step S6009, in the effect control CPU 101, whether the change pattern of the hold display determined in step S6007X is any of the change patterns 401 to 404, 421,414 (change pattern including the change from the special hold to the normal hold). It is confirmed whether or not (step S6009). If it is any of the change patterns 401 to 404, 421, 414, the effect control CPU 101 sets a restriction flag indicating that the change from the special hold to the normal hold is restricted (step S6010).

The restriction flag set in step S6010 starts the effect symbol change when the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is exhausted, and when the change display corresponding to the hold display is started or ended. It is reset in the processing and the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing.

In this embodiment, in the process of step S6005X, the final display mode of the reserved display is determined using a final display mode determination table different from the process of step S6005 shown in the first embodiment (step S6005X). ..

55 and 56 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table in the second embodiment. However, when the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 1
01 determines the final display mode of the hold display using the same final display mode determination table as in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is determined when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is "3" or "4". The variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates a non-reach outlier (
In the case of the variation category 1) shown in FIG. 16, when the restriction flag is not set, the final display mode determination for holding 3 to 4 pieces, non-reach off, and restriction flag off shown in FIG. 55 (D-1) is determined. If a table is selected and the limit flag is set, FIG. 55 (D-2).
Select the final display mode determination table for 3 to 4 pending and non-reachable and restricted flag-on shown in. Further, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates that the super reach is off (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), if the restriction flag is not set, it is shown in FIG. 55 (E-1). When the final display mode determination table for holding 3 to 4 pieces and super reach is off and the limit flag is turned off is selected and the limit flag is set, the hold 3 to 4 pieces and super are shown in FIG. 55 (E-2). Select the final display mode determination table for out-of-reach and limit flag-on. Further, the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates a super reach jackpot (variable categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17).
If so, if the restriction flag is not set, hold 3 to shown in FIG. 56 (F-1).
When the final display mode determination table for 4 pieces and super reach jackpot and limit flag off is selected and the limit flag is set, 3 to 4 hold and super reach jackpot and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 56 (F-2) are set. Select the final display mode determination table for limiting flag on. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

Further, in this embodiment, in the process of step S6007X, the change pattern of the hold display is determined using a change pattern determination table different from the process of step S6007 shown in the first embodiment (step S6007X). ..

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table in the second embodiment. However, the effect control CPU 101 has FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (E) and FIGS. 41 (F).
With respect to the change pattern determination table shown in (H) to (H), the change pattern of the hold display is determined by using the same table as those change pattern determination tables shown in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, in the effect control CPU 101, the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is "4", and the variation indicated by the variation category command is used. If the category indicates a super reach jackpot (variable categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), and if red hold is determined as the final display mode, hold 4 if the limit flag is not set. Select the change pattern determination table for individual and super reach jackpot and red hold and limit flag off, and if the limit flag is set, change pattern determination for 4 hold and super reach jackpot and red hold and limit flag on. Select a table.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (that is, when the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is displayed), the normal hold (that is, when the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is displayed). It is configured not to determine (with special hold). Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set, the change patterns 411 and 414 including the change from the special hold to the normal hold are not determined. ..
With such a configuration, in this embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the other hold display is changed from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is exhausted. It is restricted so that there is no.

In this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (when the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is displayed), the other hold display may change from the special hold to the normal hold. Although the case is shown in which it is restricted so as not to be present, not limited to such an embodiment, it may be configured to be restricted by reducing the rate at which the other hold display changes from the special hold to the normal hold.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect is limited (in this example, when the limit flag is set (that is, from special hold to normal hold). (When the hold display changed to) is displayed, the change pattern 411,414 including the change from normal hold (via special hold) or change from special hold to normal hold is not determined.)
.. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game when the change effect is executed.

Embodiment 3.
In the first embodiment, the display mode (blue hold or red hold) with higher expectation than the normal mode is used.
Although the case of changing the hold display is shown in the above, the hold display may be configured to be changeable in a display mode suggesting the content of the effect. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which the hold display can be changed to a display mode suggesting the effect content will be described.

In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the portion different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that a total hold storage display unit for displaying the total number of hold storages is provided instead of these. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine provided with the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b. May be good.

Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the normal jackpot, the probabilistic jackpot, and the sudden probabilistic jackpot are provided as the jackpot types is shown, but in this embodiment, instead of these, 1
It is assumed that a 5R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, and a sudden probability variation jackpot are provided.

In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display displayed in the total hold storage display unit, a normal display mode showing the reliability for a 15R / 8R probability variation jackpot and an effect suggestion suggesting the execution of a predetermined effect. A display mode is provided.

The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white, "red" displayed in red, and "gold" displayed in gold, and the reliability for becoming a 15R / 8R probability variable jackpot. Is gold>red> white.

In the effect suggestion display mode, the first special suggestion mode that suggests that the special zone effect is to be announced by displaying the character "special" and the special zone effect by displaying the character "special?" The second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is the subject of the notice of
By displaying the characters "", a pseudo-ream suggestion mode that suggests that the pseudo-ream is executed, and
SP that suggests that it will develop into super reach by displaying the letters "SP"
Suggested embodiments are included. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when it is the target of the notice of the special zone effect, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether or not it is the target of the notice of the special zone effect. It is a display mode to obtain. Further, the pseudo-ream suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-ream is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super reach is developed.

The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one fluctuation or a plurality of continuous fluctuations. Further, the special zone effect has a configuration in which the higher the number of executions, the higher the reliability of the 15R / 8R probability variation jackpot. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as "entering the special zone". Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect that indicates that the rush to the special zone has been confirmed after suggesting that the rush to the special zone (for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (4) and 64 (5) described later, “special”. It is a production that displays "Success!" After displaying "Zone chance!"). In addition, when the player does not enter the special zone, a rush failure effect that gives the player a sense of expectation may be executed by suggesting that the player will enter the special zone. For example, after suggesting that you will enter the special zone as in the case of the successful entry effect, an effect that indicates that you will not enter the special zone (for example, after displaying "Special zone chance!"
It is possible to execute the effect of displaying "Failure ..." as a rush failure effect. Hereinafter, the rush success effect and the rush failure effect may be collectively referred to as a "rush notice effect". The rush notice effect is an effect that is performed for 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. And when entering a special zone,
The special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (at the end of the successful rush effect). If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation for executing the rush notice effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the fluctuation is stopped.
The rush notice production shall be forcibly terminated a second before. At that time, when entering the special zone, the successful entry effect is forcibly terminated and the special zone effect is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit, the hold display for the hold memory that has not been changed is performed, and the change display for the hold memory is started and ended. The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed in the active display unit different from the total hold storage display unit. That is, the active display (image corresponding to the variable display) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the active display unit. The active display is an image showing the reliability of the occurrence of a jackpot based on the fluctuation during execution. The display mode of the active display is the same as the above-mentioned hold display mode (normal display mode "white", "red", "gold", and the first special suggestion mode and the second special suggestion mode, which are the effect suggestion display modes. Suggestion mode, pseudo-ream suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) are provided.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when a start prize is generated, first, a change mode of the normal display mode (holding change pattern and change timing described later) is determined, and then whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode is determined. do. If it is decided not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing at the time of the start winning. In addition, when it is decided to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing at the time of the start winning, and the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example,). 5 after starting the special zone production
Usually suggested after seconds, 5 seconds after re-variation in the pseudo-ream, 5 seconds after starting superreach), or when it is confirmed that it will not be executed (for example, when a rush failure effect is executed). It is designed to change to the display mode.

Further, in this embodiment, in the effect control process process (step S705), the hold display control process for controlling the hold display is executed. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process according to the third embodiment. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining the hold change pattern of the hold display for the newly generated hold storage (step S3).
701). Specifically, the hold change pattern is determined using the hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A).

FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram showing a pending change pattern determination table. In each pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A), the judgment result at the time of winning (15R probability variation jackpot or 8R)
Judgment values corresponding to the pending change pattern are assigned according to the probability change jackpot, super reach loss, etc.), but in the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), the assigned judgment values are assigned to simplify the explanation. The percentage of is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the pending change pattern determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, 10%.
P01 is determined as a pending change pattern, P02 is determined at a rate of 15%, P03 is determined at a rate of 20%, P04 is determined at a rate of 25%, and P05 is determined at a rate of 30%.

For example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach, 70% of P01, 15% of P02, 7% of P03, 5% of P04, and 3% of P04. P05 is determined as a pending change pattern.

For example, if the winning determination result is other, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

By determining the hold change pattern at such a ratio, the reliability of the hold display or active display display mode for becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot is white <red <gold.

Further, the pending change patterns in the present embodiment are a pending change pattern that does not become "red" (hereinafter, may be referred to as "no red"; for example, P01) and a pending change pattern that becomes "red" (hereinafter, referred to as "red"). It may be said that there is red. For example, it can be roughly divided into (other than P01).
Therefore, the selection ratios with and without red are shown in FIG. 60 (B).

As shown in the figure, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, 90% select with red and 10% select without red. If the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach, select with red at a rate of 30% and select without red at a rate of 70%. If the judgment result at the time of winning is other, select no red at a rate of 100%.

In this embodiment, when the selection ratio of the execution of the special zone effect and the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. 60 (B) are compared, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, The selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio to execute the special zone effect, while the selection ratio with red is lower than the ratio to execute the special zone effect when the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach. It has become. Therefore, when the presence of red is selected, the reliability of the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 8R probability variation jackpot is higher than when the special zone effect is selected. That is, in the present embodiment,
The display of the hold display or the active display whose display mode is "red" is configured to be more reliable than the special zone effect.

In this embodiment, P02 to P05 can be selected only when the judgment result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or a super reach deviation.
It is not limited to this. For example, P02 to P05 may be selectable even if the determination result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a normal reach loss or a non-reach loss.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the hold change pattern determined in step S3701 in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the total number of hold storages) in the start winning command storage area, thereby changing the hold. Store the pattern (step S3702)
.. If the stored pending change pattern is a pending change pattern (P01 or P03) with no change, the process proceeds to step S3710. When the stored hold change pattern is a hold change pattern with a change (any of P02, P04, P05), a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing is performed (step S3704). Specifically, FIG. 61 (
The change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in A) or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B).

FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 61 (
B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second change timing determination lottery table. FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B)
), A judgment value corresponding to the change timing is assigned to each change timing determination lottery table for each total pending storage number. However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), the description is simplified. Therefore, the ratio of the assigned judgment values is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a change timing determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

First, a case where a change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (A) will be described. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is a big hit.

For example, when the total number of pending storage is "1", 60% is active and 40%.
The active start time is determined as the change timing at the ratio of.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "2", 50% is active and 30%.
The active start time is determined at a rate of 20%, and the first item is determined as a change timing at a rate of 20%.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "3", 40% is active and 30%.
The rate of active start is determined as the rate of 20%, the first as the rate of change, and the second as the rate of change at 10%.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "4", it is active at a rate of 30% and 25%.
At the start of active at the rate of, 20% for the first, 15% for the second, 10
The third change timing is determined at a rate of%.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "5", 22% is active and 20%.
At the start of active at the rate of 18%, the first one at the rate of 16%, the second one at the rate of 16%, 14
The third change timing is determined at a rate of%, and the fourth change timing is determined at a rate of 10%.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "6", 22% is active and 18%.
At the start of active at 16%, the first at 14%, the second at 14%, 12
The 3rd at a rate of%, the 4th at a rate of 10%, and the 5th at a rate of 8% are determined as change timings.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "7", 20% is active and 18%.
At the start of active at 16%, the first at 14%, the second at 14%, 12
% 3rd, 10% 4th, 6% 5th, 4% 6
The item is determined as the change timing.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "8", 20% is active and 18%.
At the start of active at 16%, the first at 14%, the second at 14%, 12
% 3rd, 8% 4th, 6% 5th, 4% 6th, 2% 7th, change Determined as timing.

Next, a case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61B will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is out of the super reach.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "1", 40% is active and 60%.
The active start time is determined as the change timing at the ratio of.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "2", 20% is active and 30%.
The active start time is determined at a rate of 50%, and the first item is determined as a change timing at a rate of 50%.

For example, when the total number of pending storage is "3", 20% is active at a rate of 10%.
The active start time is determined at a rate of 30%, the first is determined at a rate of 40%, and the second is determined as a change timing.

For example, if the total number of pending storage is "4", 10% is active and 15%.
At the start of active at the rate of 20%, the first one at the rate of 25%, the second one at the rate of 25%, 30
The third change timing is determined at a rate of%.

For example, when the total number of pending storage is "5", 14% is active at a rate of 10%.
At the start of active at 16%, the first at 18%, the second at 18%, 20
The third change timing is determined at a rate of%, and the fourth change timing is determined at a rate of 22%.

For example, when the total number of pending memories is "6", 8% is active, 10% is active, 12% is the first, and 14% is two. Eyes, 16%
The 3rd item is determined as the change timing, the 4th item is determined as the 18% rate, and the 5th item is determined as the 22% rate.

For example, when the total number of pending storage is "7", 4% is active, 6% is active, 10% is the first, and 12% is two. 14% for the 3rd eye, 16% for the 4th eye, 18% for the 5th eye, 20% for the 6th eye
The item is determined as the change timing.

For example, when the total number of pending storage is "8", 2% is active, 4% is active, 6% is the first, and 8% is two. 12% of the 3rd, 14% of the 4th, 16% of the 5th, 18% of the 6th, 20% of the 7th. Determine the eye as the timing of change.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easier to determine the change timing at an earlier time after the start of the hold display in the case of the out-of-order than in the case of the big hit.
Therefore, as for the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the later the time after the start of the hold display, the higher the reliability of the jackpot.
On the contrary, the earlier the hold display is started, the higher the reliability for the big hit may be, or the change timing may not show the reliability for the big hit.

In the present embodiment, when the winning determination result is neither a big hit nor a super reach deviation (other cases), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern, so that the change timing for other purposes can be selected. A decision lottery table is not provided, but if the configuration is such that a pending change pattern whose display mode changes can be selected even in other cases, a change timing determination lottery table for other purposes is provided. May be good.

After that, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start winning command storage area (step S3705). Then, when the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is the pending change pattern having two changes (that is, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707).
), If the determined change timing is different from the change timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the change timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). Step S3
When the change timing determined in 707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), the change timing determination lottery (step) until a change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined. S3707) is repeatedly executed. As a result, two different change timings are determined. It should be noted that a plurality of combination patterns of the two change timings are provided, and the two change timings may be collectively determined by selecting one of them.

After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes a process (steps S3710 to S3725) for displaying the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode. Specifically, the process includes the first process (steps S3710 to S) relating to displaying the hold display in the first special suggestion mode.
3713), the second process (steps S3714 to S3717) relating to displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode, and the third process (steps S3718 to S3721) relating to displaying the hold display in the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode. ), And a fourth process (steps S3722 to S3725) relating to displaying the hold display in the SP suggestion mode.

Hereinafter, the hold display in the first special suggestion mode is "first special suggestion hold", the hold display in the second special suggestion mode is "second special suggestion hold", and the hold display in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode is "pseudo-ream suggestion hold". , The hold display in the SP suggestion mode may be referred to as "SP suggestion hold".

First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the new hold storage is scheduled to enter the special zone to be announced (step S3710). For example, a flag is set when it is decided to enter the special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that a new reserved memory is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified. ..

When the new hold memory is scheduled to enter the special zone to be announced, the first special suggestion execution lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed (step S3711).
). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special suggestion hold by using the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A).

FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A), a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the display of the first special suggestion hold is executed is assigned to each of the winning judgment result and the hold change pattern. FIG. 62 (
In the example shown in A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, and the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the first special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 40% at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold. Further, if the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 80% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 20%. To.

For example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach, the pending change pattern is P0.
If it is 1, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 30% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%. In addition, the pending change pattern is P.
If it is other than 01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 60% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 40%.

When it is decided to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold, the display of the first special suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3713).

If the new hold memory is not scheduled to enter the special zone to be announced in step S3710, or if the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 has the new hold memory to enter the notice target. When the advance notice effect is executed (when it is planned to move to the special zone (when the rush success effect is planned to be executed), and when it is not planned to move to the special zone but the rush failure effect is planned to be executed). (Including)) (step S3714). For example, a flag is set when it is decided to enter a special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that a new hold memory is scheduled to execute a successful entry effect to be announced. Is. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the rush failure effect, a flag is set, and if the flag is set, the new hold memory is scheduled to execute the rush failure effect to be announced. It is a judgment.

When the rush notice effect is scheduled to be executed, a second special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold (step S3715). Specifically, FIG. 6
It is determined whether or not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold by using the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in 2 (B).

FIG. 62B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B), a rush success effect is executed as a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed for each winning judgment result and the hold change pattern. Different values are assigned depending on the case of performing and the case of executing the rush failure effect, but in the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), the ratio of the assigned judgment values is shown for the sake of simplification of the explanation. There is. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

First, a case where the winning determination result is a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot will be described.

For example, when the rush success effect is planned to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 40%. , It is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 60%. Further, if the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 80% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 20%. To.

For example, when the rush failure effect is planned to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 80%. , It is decided not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 20%. Further, if the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 40% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 60%. To.

Next, a case where the judgment result at the time of winning is out of the super reach will be described.

For example, when the rush success effect is planned to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 30%. , It is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%. Further, if the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 60% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 40%. To.

For example, when the rush failure effect is planned to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 60%. , It is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 40%. Further, if the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 30% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%. To.

Finally, a case where the judgment result at the time of winning is other than that will be described.

For example, if you plan to execute the rush failure effect (if you do not plan to move to the special zone), do not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 100% regardless of the hold change pattern. Is determined. In the present embodiment, if the winning determination result is other than that, the special zone is not entered. Therefore, whether or not the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed when the entry success effect is executed is determined. Judgment values for determination are not assigned.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display the hold display in the second special suggestion mode only when the judgment result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or a super reach deviation. However, it is not limited to this, and the judgment result at the time of winning suddenly changes.
It may be possible to display the hold display in the second special suggestion mode even when the small hit, the normal reach is off, or the non-reach is off.

Further, in this way, when the hold change pattern is other than P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed at a higher rate when the rush success effect is executed than when the rush failure effect is executed. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed, the display mode is more likely to change to "red" in the case of entering the special zone than in the case of not entering the special zone. It should be noted that the display mode may not change to "red" when the special zone is not entered.

Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B) is compared with the selection ratio of the red hold shown in FIG. 60 (B). For example, the judgment result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation jackpot or 8
In the case of the R probability variation jackpot, the selection rate with red is 90% (see FIG. 60 (B)), while the execution rate of the second special suggestion hold is less than 90% (see FIG. 62 (B)). ). Also, for example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red is 30%.
On the other hand (see FIG. 60 (B)), the execution rate of the second special suggestion hold is 30% or more (see FIG. 62 (B)). Therefore, the reliability for becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot is red hold> second special suggestion hold.

When it is decided to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold, the display of the second special suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3717).

When the new hold memory does not execute the rush notice effect of the advance notice in step S3714, or when the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed in step S3716, the effect control CPU 101 has a new hold memory accompanied by a pseudo-ream. It is determined whether or not it is a pseudo-continuous hold (step S3718). In the case of pseudo-continuous suggestion hold, a pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the display of pseudo-continuous suggestion hold (step S3719). In particular,
It is determined whether or not to execute the display of the pseudo-continuous suggestion hold by using the pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C).

FIG. 62 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery table. The pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C) is assigned a determination value corresponding to whether or not the display of the pseudo-continuous suggestion hold is executed for each of the winning determination result and the hold change pattern. In the example shown in (C), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, if the winning judgment result is a big hit and the pending change pattern is P01, 2
It is determined that executing the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold at a rate of 0% does not execute the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold at a rate of 80%. If the pending change pattern is other than P01,
It is determined that the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 30% and the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%.

For example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is out of order and the pending change pattern is P01, 1
It is determined that the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 0% and the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 90%. If the pending change pattern is other than P01,
It is determined that the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 20% and the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 80%.

When it is decided to execute the display of the pseudo-continuous suggestion hold, the display of the pseudo-continuous suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3721).

If the new hold storage is not a pseudo-ream hold in step S3718, or if the display of the pseudo-ream suggestion hold is not executed in step S3720, the effect control CPU 101 is an SP reach hold in which the new hold storage develops into super reach. Judge whether or not (
Step S3722). In the case of SP reach hold, an SP suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the display of SP suggestion hold is performed (step S3723). Specifically, FIG. 6
2 (D) It is determined whether or not to execute the display of the SP suggestion hold by using the SP suggestion execution lottery table.

FIG. 62 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. The SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D) is assigned a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the SP suggestion hold is displayed for each winning judgment result and the hold change pattern, but FIG. 62 (D). In the example shown in), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, if the winning judgment result is a big hit and the pending change pattern is P01, 3
It is determined that performing the SP suggestion hold display at a rate of 0% does not perform the SP suggestion hold display at a 70% rate. If the pending change pattern is other than P01, 40
It is determined that performing the display of SP suggestion hold at a rate of% does not perform the display of SP suggestion hold at a rate of 60%.

For example, if the judgment result at the time of winning is out of order and the pending change pattern is P01, 2
It is determined that performing the SP suggestion hold display at a rate of 0% does not perform the SP suggestion hold display at a rate of 80%. If the pending change pattern is other than P01, 30
It is determined that performing the display of SP suggestion hold at a rate of% does not perform the display of SP suggestion hold at a rate of 70%.

When it is decided to execute the hold display in the SP suggestion mode, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

Here, comparing the pseudo-ream suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C) with the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), when the pending change pattern is other than P01, the pseudo-ream suggestion execution lottery table is compared. The execution rate of the suggestion hold display and the execution rate of the SP suggestion hold display are different.
That is, it is configured to change from the effect suggestion display mode to "red" at a different ratio depending on the type of the effect suggestion display mode. This makes it possible to pay attention to the type of effect suggestion display mode.

When the new hold storage is not SP reach hold in step S3722, or when the display of SP suggestion hold is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101
Starts the display of the hold display for the new hold storage in the display mode corresponding to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702 (step S3726). Specifically, P0
If it is any of 1, P02, P04, hold display is started with "white", and P03 or P0
If it is 5, the hold display is started with "red".

In the present embodiment, as shown in steps S3710 to S3725, the display timing of the hold display of the effect suggestion mode is set to the start winning time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the hold display or the active display of the effect suggestion mode at any timing such as when the hold display is shifted, during the variable display, or during the active display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by executing the processes in the order of the first process, the second process, the third process, and the fourth process, the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is set to the first special suggestion mode> the second. It is conceivable that the special suggestion mode> the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode> the SP suggestion mode. Therefore, for example, it is possible to collectively determine which of the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode is used to display the hold display or the active display. By providing a table, it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased. Alternatively, even if a lottery is performed in order as to whether or not to execute the hold display or the active display in each effect suggestion display mode as in the present embodiment, the execution rate is lower as the lottery is executed first. By doing so (the more the lottery is executed later, the higher the execution rate is), it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect suggestion display mode among the plurality of effect suggestion display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the hold display in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. For example, when it is decided to execute the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, "
A hold display including the characters "special" and "SP" may be displayed.
Specifically, by executing the above-mentioned first process to the fourth process independently, it may be possible to display the hold display in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. Since the advance notice effects suggested by the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode are both special zone effects, the hold display is performed in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. It may be configured not to be executed. For example, the hold display of the first special suggestion display mode may be displayed with priority over the hold display of the second special suggestion display mode.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the third embodiment. In the process during the change of the effect symbol, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step S4701). Specifically, in the above-mentioned active information storage area, the active state is stored as the change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, it is determined that the change timing is the active display. .. As described above, although the active state is stored as the change timing, when the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation is shorter than 13 seconds, 1 second before the fluctuation stops is determined as the change timing of the active display. It shall be. When it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the hold change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to "red", and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to "gold".

In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode,
(Y in step S4703), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the successful rush effect (Y).
Step S4704). Specifically, when the rush success effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the rush success effect is the end timing of the rush success effect. When the rush success effect is started during the fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, the timing 1 second before the fluctuation stop is determined to be the end timing of the rush success effect. When it is the end timing of the rush success effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is set to "white", and if it is P02, it is set to "white" if it is before the change timing.
If it is after the change timing, it will be "red". If the pending change pattern is P03, it will be "red".
If it is 04, it is "white" if it is before both change timings, "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and if it is after both change timings. If it is P05, it is changed to "gold", if it is before the change timing, it is changed to "red", and if it is after the change timing, it is changed to "gold".

If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation in which the rush success effect is executed is less than 8 seconds (the period for executing the rush success effect (3 seconds) and the display of the hold display or the active display after the rush success effect is completed). When the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period of the waiting period (5 seconds) until the mode is changed), the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the fluctuation stop.

In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode,
(Y in step S4706), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the rush notice effect (rush success effect or rush failure effect) (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush notice effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the rush notice effect is the end timing of the rush notice effect. When the rush notice effect is started during the fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, the timing 1 second before the change stop is determined to be the end timing of the rush notice effect. When it is the end timing of the rush notice effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708).
). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is set to "white", if it is P02, it is set to "white" if it is before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is set to "red". If it is P03, it will be "red", if it is P04, it will be "white" if it is before both change timings, and if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it will be "red". If it is after both change timings, it is changed to "gold", if it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is changed to "gold".

If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation in which the rush notice effect is executed is less than 8 seconds (the period for executing the rush notice effect (3 seconds) and the display of the hold display or the active display after the rush notice effect is completed). When the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period of the waiting period (5 seconds) until the mode is changed), the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the fluctuation stop.

Further, when the active display is displayed in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode, (step S47).
Y) of 09, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the pseudo-ream (step S4710).
Specifically, in the pseudo-ream, the re-variation is generally started after the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, but in step S4710, the first re-variation timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo-ream. .. The stop timing of the first chance symbol may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo-ream.

When it is the start timing of the pseudo-ream, the display mode of the active display displayed in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4).
711). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is set to "white", if it is P02, it is set to "white" if it is before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is set to "red". If it is P03, it is "red", if it is P04, it is after one change timing, but if it is before the other change timing, it is "red", and if it is after both change timings, it is "gold". , P05, if it is before the change timing, it is changed to "red", and if it is after the change timing, it is changed to "gold".

In addition, a fluctuation pattern is provided in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the pseudo-ream, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, it is determined to stop the fluctuation. The display mode of the active display may be changed before the time (for example, 1 second before).

Further, when the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, (step S471).
2 Y), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S4).
713). Specifically, a predetermined timing for each fluctuation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. If it is the start timing of the super reach production, S
After 5 seconds, the display mode of the active display displayed in the P suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern (step S4714). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is set to "white", and if it is P02, it is set to "white" if it is before the change timing.
If it is after the change timing, it will be "red". If the pending change pattern is P03, it will be "red".
If it is 04, it is after one change timing, but if it is before the other change timing, it is "red", if it is after both change timings, it is "gold", and if it is P05, it is change timing. If it was before, change it to "red", and if it is after the change timing, change it to "gold".

A fluctuation pattern is provided in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the super reach effect, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation is stopped. The display mode of the active display may be changed before a predetermined time (for example, 1 second before).

After that, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S8).
It is updated to the value corresponding to 03) (step S8116).

64 and 65 are explanatory views showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. First, while (1) the active display and the two hold displays are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display corresponding to the hold memory is the second special suggestion mode (“). Is it special? ") Is displayed. At this time, it is determined that the special zone effect for which the reserved memory is the target of advance notice is executed, and "3" is set as the execution number K and "3" is set as the residual number R. Further, it is assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and the first and second change timings are determined.

Then, (3) the fluctuation ends at the deviation, and (4) the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the remaining number R becomes "2", and the value obtained by adding "1" to the remaining number R and the execution number K become the same value, so that the rush notice effect is executed. When 3 seconds have passed since then, it is notified that (5) the rush was successful, and the player rushes into the special zone. Then, 5 seconds later, (
6) The display mode of the hold display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to "red" (see step S4708).

After that, the fluctuation ends at the deviation of (7), and (8) the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in "red" is P04, and since the first change timing is included in the change timing, the display mode changes to "gold".

As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display, and the specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the hold display and the active display), is at least normal. An aspect (“white” in this example), a first specific aspect (“red” in this example) that is more expected than a normal aspect, and a second specific aspect (in this example, “effect”) that suggests the content of the effect. A specific display means that can be displayed in any display mode including a suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) (in this example, for effect control). Steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S372 in the microcomputer 100.
6, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714) and the effect execution means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect. In steps S8010, S801
Steps S8013 and S81 according to the process table selected in the same process as 1.
By executing the same processing as 05, a special zone effect, a pseudo-ream, and a super reach effect) can be executed), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode and then displays the specific display. When the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second specific mode. Can be changed from to the first specific mode (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100).
Is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, which is the second display mode, when any one of P02 to P05 is selected as the pending change pattern by executing steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714. The hold display or active display that has been displayed can be changed to "red", which is the first specific mode). Thereby, the expectation for a specific aspect can be increased.

When the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, for example, the first specific embodiment or the second specific embodiment shown in this embodiment is the first embodiment. Corresponds to the second aspect shown in the above embodiment, and after displaying the specific display by the first aspect (special hold), the first aspect (special hold) is changed to the first specific aspect or the second specific aspect. It is possible to configure.

Further, it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first to third embodiments shown above. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the plurality of embodiments of the first embodiment to the third embodiment shown above may be appropriately combined.
The gaming machine may be configured by combining the configurations shown in all the embodiments.

[Multiple production modes related to hold display and active display]
With respect to the above-mentioned hold notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and the above-mentioned effect that changes the display mode of the active display (hereinafter, also referred to as active notice effect), the execution ratio of the effect is different depending on the effect mode. It may be configured in. Hereinafter, an example in which the execution ratio of the hold notice effect and the execution rate of the active notice effect are different depending on the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72.

FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode selection screen that can be selected by the player. In the effect mode selection screen in the present embodiment, the game state is the normal state, and the effect control CPU 10
It is displayed by operating the push button 120 while 1 is executing the customer waiting demonstration. On the production mode selection screen, "Sunny mode", "Rain mode",
And three production modes of "thunder mode" can be selected.

On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the "sunny mode" icon 900a is displayed, and then operates the push button 120. "Sunny mode" as the production mode of
Is selected. When the "sunny mode" is selected, as shown in FIG. 66B, the effect control CPU 101 displays the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 as a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains. Switch to image. Then, the subsequent variable display of the effect pattern is executed with the sunny image as the background image.

On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the "rain mode" icon 900b is displayed, and then operates the push button 120. "Rain mode" is selected as the production mode of. When "rain mode" is selected, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the effect control CPU.
101 switches the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to a rain image showing a rainy landscape including rain clouds and raindrops. Then, the subsequent variable display of the effect pattern is executed with the rain image as the background image.

On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the "lightning mode" icon 900c is displayed, and then operates the push button 120. "Lightning mode" is selected as the production mode of. When "lightning mode" is selected, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the effect control CPU.
101 switches the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to a lightning image showing a lightning landscape including thunderclouds and lightning. Then, the subsequent variable display of the effect pattern is executed with the lightning image as the background image.

The background image in the sunny mode, the background image in the rain mode, and the background image in the lightning mode are all applied as the background image in the normal state (S6 described above).
40) If the game state is in the time-saving state, the background image corresponding to the effect mode in the time-saving state is displayed (S643 described above), and if the game state is in the probability-changing state, the background image corresponding to the effect mode in the probability-changing state is displayed. (S647 described above).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (C), in the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display guide 1000 is displayed in the center of the lower part of the screen, and the first hold display guide 1001a to the left side of the active display guide are displayed. 1001d is displayed, and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed on the right side of the active display guide. All of these are guide information that informs the player of the position where the information corresponding to the variable display (hold display and active display) should be displayed, and the information corresponding to the variable display (hold display and active display).
This is guide information so that the player can easily grasp whether or not is displayed.

The active display guide 1000 displayed in the center of the lower part of the screen indicates the position where the active display should be displayed. In this example, the black-painted frame located at the four corners of the upper left, the lower left, the upper right, and the lower right. It is composed of. When the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000, and when the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed, the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000. Will not be done. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (C), since the variable display of the effect symbol is within the period of execution, the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000.

The first hold display guide 1001a displayed on the lower left side of the screen (first hold storage display unit 9a).
~ 1001d indicates a position where the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage should be displayed, and in this example, it is a downward isosceles triangle. Since the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is 4, four first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed. For example, when the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed. Above, each first
The hold display corresponding to the hold storage is displayed. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (C), since the first hold storage number is 3, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c, respectively. The hold display is not displayed above the first hold display guide 1001d. It can be said that the first hold display guide in which the hold display is not displayed above is display information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol for which the start condition is not satisfied.

The second hold display guide 1002a displayed on the lower right side of the screen (second hold storage display unit 9b).
~ 1002d indicates a position where the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage should be displayed, and is a rectangle in this example. Since the upper limit of the second reserved storage number is 4, four second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. For example, when the second reserved storage number is 4, the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. A hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed at the upper part. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (C), since the second hold storage number is 0, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is above the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d. Not displayed. It can be said that the second hold display guide in which the hold display is not displayed above is display information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for which the start condition is not satisfied.

When the variation display of the effect symbol is completed, the active display displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000 is erased, and each hold display (second) displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d is deleted. (When the number of reserved storage is 0 and the first number of reserved storage is 1 or more), or each of the reserved displays displayed above the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d (when the number of second reserved storage is 1 or more). ) Is shifted to the center side (active display guide 1000 side) by one each, and a shift effect is executed.

That is, when the second hold storage number is 0 and the first hold storage number is 1 or more, the hold display displayed above the first hold display guide 1001a is the active display guide as the shift effect is executed. Each hold display displayed above the first hold display guides 1001b to 1001d is shifted above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c, respectively, while being shifted within the frame of 1000 and displayed as an active display. ..

When the number of second hold storages is 1 or more, the hold display displayed above the second hold display guide 1002a shifts within the frame of the active display guide 1000 and is active as the shift effect is executed. It is displayed as a display, and the second hold display guide 1002b ~
Each hold display displayed above 1002d is the second hold display guide 1002a to 10
It shifts upward of 02c respectively.

In the example of the sunny mode shown in FIG. 66B, the hold display displayed above the first hold display guide 1001b is the target of the hold notice effect and is in red hold, and the first hold display guide The other hold display and the active display displayed above the 1001a and the first hold display guide 1001c are in the normal mode. Further, in the example of the rain mode shown in FIG. 66C, the hold display and the active display displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c are all in the normal mode.

On the other hand, in the lightning mode shown in FIG. 66 (D), unlike the sunny mode and the rain mode, both the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are used. It is not displayed on the screen, and neither the active display nor the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed on the screen. In this example, these display information related to variable display (
The active display guide 1000, the first hold display guide 1001a to 1001d, the second hold display guide 1002a to 1002d, the active display, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage) are displayed on the screen. Although an example is shown in which the display information is not displayed, the display information may be displayed in a mode in which the visibility is extremely low, for example, the outline of the display information may be displayed with a low visibility that the player cannot recognize.

In this way, by selecting the lightning mode as the effect mode, it is possible to prevent the active display and the hold display from being displayed on the screen. Further, even though the active display and the hold display are not displayed on the screen, the active display guide 1000, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, and the second hold display guides 1002a to 10
If 02d is still displayed, the player may feel a sense of discomfort, or the variable display status of the effect symbol, or the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be misunderstood. Therefore, in the lightning mode. , Active display guide 1000, and first hold display guide 1001a to 1001.
d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d themselves are not displayed either.

That is, when the effect control CPU 101 can control a plurality of effect modes in which the legibility of the active display and the hold display are different and the execution ratios of the active notice effect and the hold notice effect are different, the effect selected by the player. By applying an appropriate display layout according to the mode (display layout related to active display and hold display), the player is not given a sense of discomfort.

Here, when the lightning mode is selected, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66B to 66D, in the effect display device 9, the first reserved storage number is set in the center of the left end of the screen regardless of the selected effect mode. A first reserved storage number special display area 1011 to be displayed is provided, and a second reserved storage number special display area 1012 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided at the center of the right end of the screen. In this example, since the first reserved storage number is 3 and the second reserved storage number is 0, FIG. 66
As shown in (B) to (D), "3" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012.

When the effect control CPU 101 receives the first hold storage number addition designation command (C000 (H)) from the game control microcomputer 560, the first hold storage number special display area 1
When the display is updated by adding 1 to the first reserved storage number displayed on 011 and the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C200 (H)) is received, the first reserved storage number special display area 101
The display is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number displayed in 1. Further, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the second reserved storage number addition designation command (C100 (H)) from the game control microcomputer 560, the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is displayed. When the display is updated by adding 1 to the reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C300 (H)) is received, the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is received. The display is updated by subtracting 1 from.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 displays the first reserved storage number stored in the game control microcomputer 560 (display control is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side) first special symbol hold. The second special symbol holding storage display 18b that displays the second reserved storage number stored in the storage display 18a and the game control microcomputer 560 (display control is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side). It is equipped with.
That is, the main board 31 side is provided with a display for performing display update control of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number.

Then, in the present embodiment, the first reserved storage number addition designation command (C000 (H)) and the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C200 (H)), which are commands received from the game control microcomputer 560,. In addition, the second hold storage number addition specification command (C100)
Based on (H)) and the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (C300 (H)), the effect control microcomputer 100 side (effect control board 80 side) also has the first hold storage number and the effect display device 9. The display control of the second reserved storage number is performed.

The display control of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number on the effect control board 80 side is performed in each of a plurality of parts. That is, display control of a plurality of systems (two systems in this example) is executed. The first is control to display the hold display of the number corresponding to the first hold storage number on the first hold display unit 9a, and display the hold display of the number corresponding to the second hold storage number on the second hold display unit 9b. The second is the control of displaying the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the control of displaying the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. be. When the effect mode is either the sunny mode or the rain mode, both the former and the latter display controls are applied, and when the effect mode is the lightning mode, only the latter display control is applied. ..

(Execution ratio of advance notice production in each production mode)
As shown in the icons 900a to 900c corresponding to each effect mode in FIG. 66 (A), in the sunny mode, the execution ratio of the hold notice effect (and the active notice effect) is the highest among the three effect modes. The execution rate of each effect is set so that the execution rate of the variable notice effect (notice effect for the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied and excluding the active notice effect) is the lowest among the three effect modes. Has been done.

Further, in the rain mode, the execution ratio of the hold notice effect (and the active notice effect) is the second highest among the three effect modes, and the change notice effect (the change display for which the start condition is satisfied is targeted). The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio of (excluding the active notice effect) is the second highest among the three effect modes.

Then, in the thunder mode, the hold notice effect (and the active notice effect) is not executed (execution ratio is 0), and the change notice effect (the change display for which the start condition is satisfied is the advance notice effect and the active notice effect). The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio of (excluding the effect) is the highest among the three effect modes.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the hold notice effect in each effect mode. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 described above, the final display mode (whether or not to execute the hold notice effect) in the hold notice effect is determined based on the latest variable category command and the first hold storage number (as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39). S6005), when the hold notice effect is executed (Y in S6006), the change pattern is determined based on the latest variable category command, the first hold storage number, and the determined final display mode (S6007).

As shown in FIG. 67, (A) [non-reach off, for 2 hold], (B) [super reach off, for 2 hold], (C) [super reach jackpot, for 2 hold], ( D) [Non-reach off, hold 3-4 pieces], (E) [Super reach off, hold 3-4 pieces], and (F) [Super reach jackpot, hold 3-4 pieces] Even in this case, the ratio of the hold notice effect to be executed in the sunny mode among the three effect modes (the ratio of the final display mode being one of normal hold (via special hold), blue hold, and red hold). Is the highest. The allocation of the final display mode in the sunny mode is the same as the ratio illustrated in FIGS. 38 and 39.

In addition, (A) [non-reach off, for 2 hold], (B) [super reach off, for 2 hold], (C) [super reach jackpot, for 2 hold], (D) [non-reach Rain in any of the cases of (E) [Super reach loss, hold 3-4 pieces], and (F) [Super reach jackpot, hold 3-4 pieces] The rate at which the hold notice effect is executed in the mode (the rate at which the final display mode is one of normal hold (via special hold), blue hold, and red hold) is about half that of the sunny mode.

On the other hand, (A) [non-reach off, for 2 hold], (B) [super reach off, for 2 hold], (C) [super reach jackpot, for 2 hold], (D) [non-reach In any case of "missing, for 3-4 holdings", (E) [missing super reach, for 3-4 holdings], and (F) [super reach jackpot, for 3-4 holdings] , In lightning mode,
Because the display information related to the hold display (first hold display guide 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guide 1002a to 1002d, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, hold display corresponding to the second hold storage) is not displayed. , The hold notice effect is not executed (the execution rate of the hold notice effect is 0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, as for the active notice effect, the sunny mode has the highest execution rate and the rain mode has the second highest execution rate (for example, the active notice effect is executed at a rate of about half of the sunny mode). ), In the thunder mode, the display information related to the active display (active display and active display guide 1000) is not displayed, so that the active notice effect is not executed (the execution rate of the active notice effect is 0%).

Further, in the sunny mode and the rain mode, the display information related to the hold display (first hold display guide 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guide 1002a to 1002d, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, second hold storage). Since the hold display corresponding to) is displayed, the shift effect can be executed, whereas in the lightning mode, the display information related to the hold display is not displayed, so that the shift effect is not executed.

If the hold display is left displayed in the thunder mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed, the hold display that the player cannot expect to change the mode will continue to be displayed, which may reduce the interest. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the thunder mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed, the hold display itself is not displayed to prevent the deterioration of the interest. In addition, if the hold display is not displayed and only the active display is displayed, the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the active display is not displayed in the lightning mode.

Further, in the sunny mode and the rain mode, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, which are information related to the hold display, the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, and the active display guide 1000, which is information related to the active display, are displayed. On the other hand, in the thunder mode, this information is erased (hidden), and an appropriate display layout according to the production mode is adopted so as not to give the player a misunderstanding or discomfort. ing.

As shown in FIG. 66 (A), if the player wants to display the hold display and execute the hold notice effect at a high rate on the effect mode selection screen, select the sunny mode, display the hold display, and display zero. If you want to execute the hold notice effect at a low rate, select the rain mode, and if you do not want to display the hold display and do not execute the hold notice effect, select the lightning mode to make it a player's preference. You can play the game in the corresponding production mode. Further, among the effect modes in which the hold display can be displayed, the effect mode (sunny mode or rain mode) can be selected depending on whether or not the hold notice effect is to be executed at a high rate. Diversity can enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), in the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed, the control for displaying the first hold storage number in the first hold storage number special display area 1011 and the second hold for the second hold storage number are performed. By displaying the memory number special display area 1012, the player can grasp the hold memory number even without the hold display.

(Preliminary effect executed in each effect mode)
Next, specific examples of the advance notice effect executed in each of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing execution timings of various effects executed in the variation display when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed based on the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in each effect mode.

It is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 starts the variation display of the effect symbol at the timing of T0 in FIG. 68 based on the reception of the variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect. At this time, when the effect mode is either the sunny mode or the rain mode, there is a possibility that the first hold storage has a special hold display timing. If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU
101 changes the hold display, which is the display timing of the special hold, to the special hold (FIG. 4).
3 step S8005 process).

Further, when the effect mode is either a sunny mode or a rain mode, the effect effect (executed in a mode that acts on the hold display) is executed in the first hold memory, and the display mode of the hold display changes. There is a possibility that there is something that is the feasible timing of the production) that suggests that. If there is a timing in which the action effect can be executed in the first hold memory, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display as an action effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the action effect. Select the table according to the embodiment (step S8007 in FIG. 43). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected action effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the effect effect (step S8008).

When it is decided to execute the action effect (Y in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and the type of action effect determined in step S8008 (step S8010). .. Then, step S801
Move to 2. As a result, during the period (T1) to (T3) of FIG. 68, a character appears as an action effect, and an effect in which the character throws a ball toward a special hold is executed (). (5) and (8) of FIG. 50, (5) and (8) of FIG.
) Etc.).

On the other hand, when the effect mode is the lightning mode, the hold display is not displayed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the action effect is not executed. There is a risk that the interest will decline from immediately after the start of the display to the first half. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the lightning mode, if it is another effect mode (sunny mode and rain mode), the blackout notice effect (the period from T1 to T3) or the period corresponding to the period in which the action effect is executed is performed. By executing the lightning effect notice effect (T2 to T3), it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.

FIG. 69 shows a specific example of the blackout notice effect and the lightning effect advance notice effect. The blackout notice effect and the thunder light effect notice effect are effects that can be executed only in the thunder mode, and are not executed in other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode). In FIG. 69 (A), when the variation display of the effect symbol is started in the lightning mode, immediately after that, a predetermined image including a background image (lightning image) displayed on the effect display device 9 at a predetermined ratio is displayed. A blackout notice effect is executed in which visibility is reduced and visibility becomes difficult (FIG. 69 (B)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the effect symbol changes even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect as a difficult-to-see effect that reduces the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device 9. The display is executed in a smaller mode than usual at the upper left of the screen, and the player can visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, although not shown, it is assumed that the variable display of the fourth symbol is also executed in a visually recognizable manner in the fourth symbol display area. note that,
Not limited to such a form, it may be difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbol during the execution period of the blackout notice effect.

The blackout notice effect is executed at a rate of 30% when the display result of the executed variation display is an out-of-order symbol, and 70% when the display result of the executed variation display is a jackpot symbol. It shall be. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the lightning mode, the player becomes interested in whether or not the screen becomes dark (whether or not the blackout notice effect is executed), and the player is put on hold in the lightning mode. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the fact that the effect and action effect are not executed.

Further, even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 69B and 69C, the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 (this example). Since 1) and the second reserved storage number (0 in this example) displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 are visibly displayed to the player, the player gives a blackout notice. Even during the execution period of the effect, the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number can be grasped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), after the blackout notice effect is executed (FIG. 68).
(At the timing of T2 shown in the above), the lightning effect advance notice effect in which the lightning light image is displayed in a mode different from the background image is executed at a predetermined ratio. The thunder light image displayed in the thunder light effect notice effect has a higher display priority than the background image (the displayed layer is higher than the background image), and is visible to the player even during the execution of the blackout notice effect. Possible (screen display possible).

The thunder light effect notice effect is executed at a rate of 10% when the display result of the executed variation display is an out-of-order symbol, and 90% when the display result of the executed variation display is a jackpot symbol. It shall be. That is, the thunder light effect notice effect is a production with a higher proportion of big hits than the blackout notice effect, and is a highly reliable effect. When the blackout notice effect is executed, the player becomes interested in whether or not the lightning effect advance notice effect is subsequently executed, and the hold notice effect and the action effect are not executed in the thunder mode. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

The lightning effect notice effect ends with the end of the blackout notice effect (T3 in FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 69 (D), when the blackout notice effect is completed, the background of the lightning image returns to a visible state again, and the variable display of the effect symbol is continued.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the thunder light effect notice effect can be executed only when the blackout notice effect is executed, but the blackout notice effect is executed without being limited to such a form. Regardless of whether or not it is possible, the lightning effect notice effect may be executed.

It should be noted that the blackout notice effect may be executed even in an effect mode in which the hold display and the hold notice effect can be executed, such as in the sunny mode and the rain mode. When the blackout notice effect is executed in the sunny mode or the rain mode, the hold display and the active display become difficult to see like the background image during the effect period, and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1
001d, 2nd hold display guide 1002a-1002d, and active display guide 10
As with the background image, 00 is also difficult to see. However, even during the effect period, the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 are shown in FIG. Similar to the example shown in 69 (B), it is visible to the player.

That is, the two systems of reserved storage number display control executed on the effect control board 80 side (display of the reserved display in the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b, the first reserved storage number special display area 1011). And one of (display of the number of reserved storages in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012) (display of the reserved display in the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b) is a blackout notice effect. The number of reserved storages (the number of displayed pending displays) becomes difficult to see during the execution period of, but the other (the number of reserved storages in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved storage number special display area 1012) The number of reserved memories remains visible to the player even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect.

Next, a specific example of the advance notice effect executed after the reach state is established in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

(In sunny mode)
When the effect mode is the sunny mode and the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) is reached according to the fluctuation pattern, the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area are the same as shown in FIG. 70 (A). The reach state in which the effect symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 “reach !!” is displayed at the upper part of the screen is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), immediately after the execution of the reach effect (at the timing shown in T5 of FIG. 68), the cut-in notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. Cut-in notice production
The display of the cut-in image 1200 and the characters displayed on the cut-in image 1200 are effects that suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit.

When the display result of the executed variation display is an out-of-order pattern, the cut-in image 1200 is not displayed at a rate of 60%, and the cut-in image 1200 is displayed at a rate of 40%.
Here, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 38%, and 2
The characters "Intense heat !!" are displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of%.

When the display result of the executed variation display is a jackpot symbol, the cut-in image 1200 is not displayed at a rate of 10%, and the cut-in image 1200 is displayed at a rate of 90%.
Here, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 40%, and 5
The characters "super heat !!" are displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and if the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, pay attention to the characters displayed there. It becomes possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. FIG. 70
In the example shown in (B), the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the characters "super heat !!" are displayed there, so that the player expects a big hit.

Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 68), the mode character advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. The mode character notice effect is shown in FIG. 70 (
As shown in C), a big hit is made by displaying an image of a character corresponding to the current production mode (here, a sunny mode) (in the sunny mode, a character image 1300a in which the characters "fine" are displayed on the face). It is a production that suggests the degree of expectation.

When the display result of the executed variation display is an out-of-order symbol, the image 1300a of the character corresponding to the sunny mode is displayed at a rate of 5%, and the display result of the executed variation display is the jackpot symbol. In this case, the image 1300a of the character corresponding to the sunny mode is displayed at a rate of 20%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300a of the character corresponding to the current effect mode, the sunny mode, appears after the cut-in notice effect is executed.

The mode character notice effect can be executed in any of the effect modes (sunny mode, rain mode, and lightning mode) regardless of whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed. When the mode character notice effect is completed (timing shown in T7 of FIG. 68), FIG. 71
As shown in (D), the variable display of the middle symbol in the reach state is continued, and the display result is finally derived and displayed (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 68).

(In rain mode)
When the effect mode is the rain mode and the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) is reached according to the fluctuation pattern, the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area are the same as shown in FIG. 71 (A). The reach state is established when the production symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped, and "Reach!
!! The reach effect is executed in which the character 1100 is displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), immediately after the execution of the reach effect (at the timing shown in T5 of FIG. 68), the cut-in is performed in the same mode and at the same ratio as in the case of the sunny mode and the case of the lightning mode described later. A notice effect is executed.

Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and if the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, the characters displayed there. It is possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (B), the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the characters "super heat !!" are displayed there.

Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 68), the mode character advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the image of the character corresponding to the current production mode (here, the rain mode) (in the rain mode, "rain" on the face".
By displaying the image 1300b) of the character in which the character of is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested.

When the display result of the executed variation display is an out-of-order symbol, the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode is displayed at a rate of 10%, and the display result of the executed variation display is the jackpot symbol. In this case, the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode, which is the current effect mode, appears after the cut-in notice effect is executed. When the mode character notice effect is completed (timing shown in T7 of FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the variable display of the middle symbol in the reach state continues, and the display result is finally derived and displayed. (Timing shown in T8 of FIG. 68).

(In lightning mode)
When the effect mode is the lightning mode and the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) is reached according to the fluctuation pattern, the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area are the same as shown in FIG. 72 (A). The reach state is established when the production symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped, and "Reach!
!! The reach effect is executed in which the character 1100 is displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), immediately after the execution of the reach effect (at the timing shown in T5 of FIG. 68), the cut-in notice effect is produced in the same mode and at the same ratio as in the case of the sunny mode and the case of the rain mode. Is executed.

Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and if the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, the characters displayed there. It is possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the characters “super heat !!” are displayed there.

Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 68), the mode character advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. That is, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), an image of a character corresponding to the current production mode (here, lightning mode) (in lightning mode, "lightning" on the face".
By displaying the image 1300c) of the character on which the character of is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested.

If the display result of the executed variation display is an out-of-order symbol, the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the lightning mode is displayed at a rate of 15%, and the display result of the executed variation display is the jackpot symbol. In this case, the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the lightning mode is displayed at a rate of 90%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the current effect mode, the lightning mode, appears after the cut-in notice effect is executed. When the mode character notice effect is completed (timing shown in T7 of FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the variable display of the middle symbol in the reach state continues, and the display result is finally derived and displayed. (Timing shown in T8 of FIG. 68).

In this way, since the types of advance notice effects that can be executed differ depending on the effect mode (for example, the blackout advance notice effect and the lightning effect advance notice effect can be executed only in the lightning mode), the player can execute each effect. You will be interested in the preview effect performed in the mode, and will also be interested in which effect mode to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cut-in notice effect can be executed immediately after the reach state is established in any of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode. In this way, by making it possible to execute a common type of effect regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to prevent the types of effect from becoming excessively large and the amount of storage of the effect data to be excessively increased. Can be done. Further, in this embodiment, the execution rate of this cut-in notice effect and the allocation of each mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed (the rate at which the characters "chance!" Are displayed, "super heat !!". The rate at which the characters "" are displayed) is also the same regardless of the production mode. Therefore, it is possible to standardize the execution control of the cut-in notice effect (for example, a table for determining the execution ratio and the allocation of modes) regardless of the effect mode, and the control can be simplified.

The execution rate of the cut-in notice effect may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, the execution rate is the highest in the lightning mode, the next highest in the rain mode, and the highest in the sunny mode. The ratio may be low.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character notice effect, which is one type of the advance notice effect, can be executed in any of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode. The character notice effect is executed in different modes depending on the effect mode (character image 1300a according to the sunny mode, character image 1300b according to the rain mode, and character 1300c image according to the lightning mode). , It is executed at different rates depending on the effect mode (the execution rate is the highest in the lightning mode, the execution rate is the next highest in the rain mode, and the execution rate is the lowest in the sunny mode), so the effect mode It is possible to create an interest according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, with respect to the thunder mode in which the hold display is not displayed and the hold notice effect is not executed, the type of the change notice effect for the running variation display can be changed to the hold display and the hold notice effect can be executed. Since there are more than other production modes (sunny mode, rain mode) and the execution ratio of the variable notice effect is set higher than other effect modes, the hold notice effect and the action effect are not executed, which reduces the interest. Can be deterred. Further, in the rain mode in which the execution rate of the hold notice effect is lower than that in the sunny mode, the execution rate of the variable notice effect is set higher than in the sunny mode. In addition, more types of variable notice effects that can be executed in the rain mode may be provided than in the sunny mode.

Contrary to the present embodiment, regarding the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed and the hold notice effect is not executed, the type of the change notice effect for the running change display is displayed as the hold display and the hold notice effect is not executed. The effect may be set to be less than that of other effect modes (sunny mode, rain mode) in which the effect can be executed, or the execution ratio of the variable advance notice effect may be set lower than that of the other effect modes. It is possible to make the effect mode suitable for the player who does not like the advance notice effect to be executed frequently. Further, even in the rain mode in which the execution rate of the hold notice effect is lower than that in the sunny mode, the execution rate of the changing notice effect may be set lower than that in the sunny mode. May be less than in sunny mode.

(Other examples related to the production mode selection screen)
In the above example, during the period when the game state is the normal state and the customer waiting demonstration is being executed, the effect mode selection screen (FIG. 66 (A)) is displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the operation of the player.
An example is shown in which an arbitrary production mode can be selected from "sunny mode", "rain mode", and "lightning mode". As the effect to be executed during the period, the effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game state may be configured to be selectable by the player.

That is, the effect control CPU 101 has the jackpot display process (S804), the round middle process (S805), the round post-process (S806), and the jackpot end effect process (S8) shown in FIG.
As any of the effects executed in 07), the effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect mode in the probable change state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to "sunny mode" or "sunny mode".
It may be possible to select from "rain mode" and "lightning mode". The player selects the effect mode after the end of the big hit game state by operating the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 during the big hit game state.

Here, regardless of which of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode is controlled, the current gaming state is a normal state, a probable change state, or a time saving state. Information indicating whether or not it is, shall be displayed as common information. Further, regarding the number of fluctuation display times (n) executed after being controlled to the time reduction state or the remaining number of fluctuation display times (100-n in this example) that can be executed in the time reduction state, information common to all the production modes. Is displayed as.

There is also a so-called special time (ST) type gaming machine in which an upper limit value (for example, 60 times) of the number of variable display times that can be executed in the probabilistic state is predetermined. In the ST type gaming machine, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variation display of the number corresponding to the upper limit value is executed without the occurrence of the next big hit, the probability change state ends and is normal. Move to the state. In such an ST type gaming machine, the remaining variation display number (remaining ST number) up to the upper limit value is displayed as common information regardless of the effect mode.

Further, the number of consecutive villas is displayed as common information regardless of which of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode is controlled. The consecutive villas mean that the next big hit occurs based on the fluctuation display executed in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state without shifting to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state of 1, and the number of consecutive villas is " Number of consecutive villas + 1 "
Is calculated by. In addition, the total number of vaginal cum shot balls, which is the number of balls paid out to the player during the period controlled by the big hit game state, and the total number of balls paid out to the player during the consecutive villa including the big hit game state. The value, the number of vaginal cum shots in the consecutive villas, is also displayed as common information. in this way,
In any of the production modes, information that is of great interest to the player is displayed appropriately.

In this example, the background image is made different according to the effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the characters appearing may be made different according to the effect mode. For example, when a ally character and an enemy character battle and a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big hit is achieved depending on the victory or defeat, the ally character may be made different according to the effect mode. By selecting a friendly character that the player likes on the effect mode selection screen, the player is controlled to the effect mode in which the advance notice effect or the battle effect in which the ally character appears is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a player can select a desired effect mode by operating the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 on the effect mode selection screen has been described, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. Instead, the touch sensor may be used to detect the player's movement and the effect mode may be selected, or the human sensor using an infrared method or the like may be used to detect the player's movement and select the effect mode.

Further, when the player does not select any of the effect modes on the effect mode selection screen (when the bush button 120 is not operated within the selection period), a predetermined effect mode (so-called default effect) is used. It may be controlled by the mode). The effect mode controlled in this case may be an effect mode (sunny mode) in which the hold display is performed and the execution rate of the hold notice effect is the highest, and the hold display is performed and the execution rate of the hold notice effect is the second. It may be a high effect mode (rain mode), or it may be an effect mode (lightning mode) in which the hold display is not performed and the hold notice effect is not executed. Further, the effect mode selected last time may be automatically selected when the selection operation is not performed this time.

In addition, it may be possible to switch the effect mode regardless of the operation of the player, and when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 101 draws a lottery to decide which effect mode to use, and based on the lottery result. The effect mode after the end of the jackpot game state may be determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may automatically switch the effect mode every predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variation display (for example, switch in the order of sunny mode, rain mode, and lightning mode). Further, in the case of an ST type gaming machine, the effect mode may be switched according to the remaining fluctuation display number of times (remaining ST number of times) up to the above-mentioned upper limit value, for example, the remaining ST number of times is from 60 times. In the period up to 41 times, it is controlled to sunny mode, 40
It may be controlled to the rain mode in the period from 1 to 21 times, and may be controlled to the lightning mode in the period of 20 times or less. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may automatically switch the effect mode according to the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state), for example.
In the normal state, it may be controlled to the sunny mode or the rain mode, and in the time saving state and the probable change state, it may be controlled to the lightning mode.

(Other examples of hold storage number display control)
In the above embodiment, the display control of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number on the effect control board 80 side is performed in each of a plurality of areas in the effect display device 9, and the display control of the two systems is executed. Has been done. The first is control to display the hold display of the number corresponding to the first hold storage number on the first hold display unit 9a, and display the hold display of the number corresponding to the second hold storage number on the second hold display unit 9b. The second is the control of displaying the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the control of displaying the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. be. Not limited to such a form, regarding the second (latter), the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed on a display device different from the effect display device 9 on which the hold display is displayed. May be. For example, a liquid crystal display device (so-called sub-liquid crystal device) different from the effect display device 9 may display the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, and may be displayed above the liquid crystal display device 9 (first special symbol). Hold storage display 18a and second special symbol hold storage display 1
A display for the first reserved storage number and a display for the second reserved storage number, which are composed of 7-segment LEDs, are provided in the center decoration installed at the center decoration (position closer to the effect display device 9 than 8b). The first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be displayed. Further, two LEDs are provided as an indicator for the first reserved storage number, and two L's are provided as an indicator for the second reserved storage number.
An ED may be provided to indicate the number of hold storages 0 to 4 by turning off, turning on, and blinking the two LEDs, respectively (for example, 0 when both are turned off, 1 when only one is turned on, and 2 when only the other is turned on. 3 when both are lit, 4, when both are blinking, etc.).

(Other examples of display layout)
In the present embodiment, as described above, the visibility of the active display (whether or not the active display is displayed), the visibility of the hold display (whether or not the hold display is displayed), and the active notice effect are displayed. There are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution ratio (whether or not the active notice effect is executed) and the execution rate of the hold notice effect (whether or not the hold notice effect is executed) are different.
In the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display can be visually recognized, and the active notice effect and the hold notice effect can be executed (the execution rate is not 0), whereas in the lightning mode. , Active display and hold display are invisible, and
The active notice effect and the hold notice effect are not executed.

Further, in the effect display device 9, the display layout of the information related to the active display and the hold display also differs depending on the effect mode. In the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display and the active display guide 1000 are displayed, and the hold display and the first display are displayed.
Hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d
Is displayed, whereas in the lightning mode, the active display and the active display guide 10 are displayed.
All 00 are hidden, and the hold display and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d
And the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are all hidden.

In this way, the display layout of the information related to the active display and the hold display is different depending on the effect mode. In the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the active display guides 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may be displayed, while the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may not be displayed. In the effect mode corresponding to the state, the active display guide 1000 and the second
While displaying the hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, the first hold display guide 1001
You may not display a to 1001d. Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state, the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may be displayed, while the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may not be displayed.

Further, the information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may not be displayed regardless of the game state. For example, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guide 1001a may not be displayed. ~ 1001d is displayed (information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d does not originally exist), while the active display guide 1000 and the first in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state.
Hold display guides 1001a to 1001d are not displayed (second hold display guide 1002a)
Information corresponding to ~ 1002d does not originally exist). That is, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probabilistic state, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed, but the position where the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage should be displayed is indicated (the start condition is). (Corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has not been established) Second hold display guide 1002a to 1002d
The information corresponding to is not displayed, and the information corresponding to the active display 1000 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for which the start condition is satisfied may not be displayed.

Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed side by side, whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state, the hold corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed. The display may be displayed vertically. Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the first possessed memory is displayed in the normal size or the normal shape (for example, a round shape), whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state. , The hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be displayed in a special size or a special shape (for example, a character shape) larger than the normal size. As described above, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state or the probable change state (when the effect mode is controlled corresponding to the time-saving state or the probable change state) (for example, in the case of Y in S6002 of FIG. 37). ), The execution rate of the hold notice effect is lower than when the game state is in the normal state (when the effect mode corresponding to the normal state is controlled) (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold notice effect is not executed).

Further, while the active display (and the active display guide 1000) can be displayed and the active notice effect can be executed, the hold display (and the first hold display guide 100) can be executed.
1a to 1001d and the second hold display guide 1002a to 1002d) are not displayed and the hold notice effect is not executed, and the active display (and the active display guide 1000)
Is not displayed and the active notice effect is not executed, while the hold display (and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d) can be displayed and the hold notice effect can be executed. It may be possible to switch to and.

Further, the ratio of displaying the character selected by the player, the position where the character is displayed, and the size of the displayed character may be different depending on the effect mode. again,
The position where the reserved storage number is displayed and the displayed size may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, the position where the fourth symbol is displayed and the size at which the fourth symbol is displayed may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, during the execution of a specific effect such as an action effect or a battle effect, a variable display of the effect symbol (that is, a variable display of the effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) is displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Although it is executed in a reduced mode in the above, the display position and size (reduction degree) of the reduced display effect symbol may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, when the variable display of the effect information corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is executed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the display position and size of the effect information differ depending on the effect mode. You may do so.

In addition, depending on the effect mode, the ratio (whether or not to display) the information related to the content (customized content) uniquely set by the player is displayed, the position where the information is displayed, and the information are displayed. The sizes may be different. For example, the ratio at which adjustment information for adjusting the volume or brightness level (for example, a level bar showing the current volume or brightness level) is displayed (whether or not to display the level bar), the adjustment information. The position where is displayed and the size at which the adjustment information is displayed may be different. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 101 is not limited to the period during which the customer waiting demonstration is being executed, but also during the period during which the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed and during the period during which the effect control CPU 101 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. It may be possible to display the adjustment information and change the volume and brightness level.

In addition, the number of points given based on the type and number of the executed effects (different from the value that can be used in the game machine awarded based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area) according to the effect mode. The position and size of the display (also referred to as experience value) may be different. In addition, regarding the mission production that informs the possibility of a big hit depending on whether or not a specific mission has been achieved, the ratio (whether or not to display) the information related to the mission production is displayed according to the production mode, and the relevant information is displayed. The displayed position and the size at which the information is displayed may be different.

In addition, depending on the production mode, whether or not to display the above-mentioned number of vaginal cum shots, the position to display the number of vaginal cum shots, and the size to display the number of vaginal cum shots are different. Is also good. again,
Depending on the effect mode, the ratio of displaying the type of big hit generated in the consecutive villa (whether or not to display), the display position of the big hit type, and the size of displaying the big hit type may be different. Further, the ratio of displaying the number of consecutive villas (whether or not to display), the display position of the number of consecutive villas, and the size of displaying the number of consecutive villas may be different depending on the effect mode.

Also, when the game ball is fired to the right of the center of the game area (when hit to the right), the special variable prize is awarded than when the game ball is fired to the left of the center of the game area (when hit to the left). When the game ball is easily won in the ball device (including the case where the special variable winning ball device is provided on the right side of the center of the game area), when the display result of the variable display becomes a big hit symbol. , The display instructing right-handed operation is performed by the effect display device 9. The display ratio (whether or not to display), the display position, and the size to be displayed may be different depending on the effect mode.

In addition, when the music (so-called BGM) output during the execution of the variable display can be selected, the ratio (whether or not to display) the image for selecting the music is displayed according to the production mode, and the image. The position to display the image and the size of the image to be displayed (or the number of selectable songs) may be different.

Regarding the example of the difference in the display layout according to the effect mode shown above, when the gaming machine includes the effect display device 9 and a liquid crystal display device (so-called sub display device) different from the effect display device 9, a plurality of these. Some of the (two) display devices (for example, sub-display devices) adopt a common display layout regardless of the effect mode, and other display devices (for example, effect display device 9) depend on the effect mode. You may adopt different display layouts. Further, in both of the two display devices, the display layout may be different depending on the effect mode.

(Example of pre-reading notice production other than hold notice production)
In the above embodiment, with respect to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the variable display to be the target of the look-ahead notice effect is set as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying whether or not the start condition is controlled in an advantageous state. The hold notice effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance eye notice effect that stops and displays the special display result such as the chance eye symbol continuously over multiple fluctuations and the look-ahead notice effect. It is possible to execute a countdown notice effect or the like that counts down the remaining number of fluctuations up to the target change over a plurality of changes as another type of look-ahead notice effect.

Here, in the thunder mode, although the hold advance notice effect is not executed, other types of look-ahead advance notice effects such as the chance eye advance notice effect and the countdown advance notice effect may be executed.
Then, in the thunder mode, the execution rate of the other types of look-ahead notice effects may be higher than in the other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode) in which the hold notice effect can be executed. Further, in the thunder mode, there may be more types of pre-reading notice effects that can be executed in addition to the hold notice effects, as compared with other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode) in which the hold notice effects can be executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the hold notice effect is not executed.

In the thunder mode, other types of pre-reading notice effects may not be executed (that is, no pre-reading notice effects are executed) as in the case of the hold notice effect, and other effect modes (that is, no pre-reading notice effects are executed) may be performed.
Other types of look-ahead notice effects may be executed (however, the execution ratio is not 0) at a lower ratio than that of the sunny mode and the rain mode).

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine capable of executing variable display and displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display. However, the gaming machine having such a configuration is a pachinko gaming machine. It is not limited to 1, and may be a slot machine.

The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three reels, a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral portion. The player sets the number of bets (1 to 3 medals), and each reel starts rotating by operating the start lever, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. Therefore, the rotation is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing.

The rotation and stop of each reel are performed by the reel motor corresponding to each reel, and the motor drive circuit corresponding to each reel motor is provided on the game control board that controls the game. The game control board is provided with a main control unit having a main CPU and the like, and the main control unit transmits a control command to the motor drive circuit to control the rotation and stop of the reel motor. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

There are various types of winning roles, such as small roles, special roles, and replay roles. here,
In the small winning combination, the player can obtain the benefit of paying out a predetermined number of medals for each type of small winning combination. In the special role winning, regular bonus (RB) from the next game
The player can obtain the benefit of being transferred to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a big bonus (BB) or a big bonus (BB). Winning a replay role can benefit from the ability to play the next game without consuming new medals to set the bet number.

In such a slot machine, after the end of the bonus, as an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the value for the game by increasing the winning probability of the re-game combination more than usual. There is one that controls the possible replay time (referred to as RT) and terminates RT when the termination conditions including winning a predetermined fall winning combination are satisfied.
Further, there is a case in which the effect state can be controlled during the assist time (referred to as AT) which is the notification period in which the navigation effect (for example, guiding the push order) for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. In addition, the assist replay time (the state in which the game state is RT and the production state is controlled by AT)
Also called ART). By setting a flag corresponding to each game state, winning combination, etc., the main control unit executes processing (including transmission of an effect control command to the sub control unit) corresponding to the set flag. The game is controlled. In addition, the effect control command for executing the effect according to each game state and the winning combination on the effect control board side is transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit.

Role lottery, AT lottery, RT lottery, ART lottery, and AT, RT, and A
The lottery for adding the number of RTs is performed, for example, at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag stored in the RAM, and the winning combination is won. The flag is stored. Whether or not the winning role is actually established is RA
It is determined by the winning flag stored in M, the operation timing of the stop button, and the like.

The effect control board 80 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment includes an effect control CPU 101 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work of the effect control CPU 101. A RAM that provides an area and a display control unit that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 9 are mounted, but the slot machine is also provided with an effect control board. A sub CPU that performs control operations according to a program, a sub control unit that has a ROM that stores programs for effect control, fixed data, etc., and a RAM that provides a work area for the sub CPU, and display operations in a liquid crystal display device. It is equipped with a display control circuit and the like to control.

In such a slot machine, the sub CPU causes the liquid crystal display device to display a specific display corresponding to a game (variable display) that has not yet been executed in either the first mode or the second mode. May be. For example, when an advantageous state such as AT, RT, or ART is won, a specific display corresponding to each game controlled by the advantageous state is displayed in the first mode, and then the game (variable display) is displayed. The specific display may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect depending on the fact that the related predetermined conditions are satisfied.

For example, when the AT of 50 games is won, the first to 50th specific displays are displayed in the first mode (for example, blue). And every time AT is digested for one game (1)
Every time the game ends, or every time the bet number is set and the start lever is operated), 1
The specific display of the first aspect of the first item is erased, and the specific display of the second and subsequent items is shifted one by one (n).
(Shifts the specific display of the item to the n-1th position) Executes the movement effect. And AT
When the additional lottery for the number of ATs is performed during the period, the specific display of the number corresponding to the number of ATs including the determined additional number of times is displayed in the second mode (for example, red). For example, when the remaining AT is n games and the additional lottery for 20 games is won, each specific display from the 1st to the (n + 20) th is displayed in the second mode. That is, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display from the first mode to the second mode is executed.

Not only AT but also RT, ART and the like may be used to control the display of the specific display as in the above AT example.

Further, regarding the specific display corresponding to each game, if the possibility of being in an advantageous state is low, the display is performed in the first mode, and if the possibility of being in an advantageous state is high, the display is performed in the second mode. good. For example, regarding the specific display outside the AT period, it is displayed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (
(Displayed in the second aspect at a rate of 20%), and for the specific display within the AT period, it is displayed in the second aspect at a rate of 80% (displayed in the first aspect at a rate of 20%). May be. Further, regarding each specific display displayed during the AT period, if the number of games until the end of AT is less than the predetermined number of games based on the specific display, the specific display is displayed at a rate of 80% in the first aspect. (Displayed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and A based on the specific display.
If the number of games until the end of T is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the specific display may be displayed in the second mode at a rate of 80% (displayed in the first mode at a rate of 20%). good.

In the configuration exemplified above, a predetermined opportunity has occurred (for example, a winning combination that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as AT, RT, ART, etc., a winning combination, a predetermined small winning combination, and a display of a specific display. Depending on the fact that the effect lottery that determines whether or not to execute the change effect that changes the aspect is won, etc.), the ratio that was originally displayed in the second aspect was high, but it is displayed in the first aspect. By changing the display mode of the specific display from the first mode to the second mode, it is possible to enhance the interest.

In this way, the slot machine that can display the specific display and can execute the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display can also display the specific display as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. The first effect mode (corresponding to the above-mentioned sunny mode and rain mode) in which the change effect can be executed, and the second effect mode in which the specific display is hidden and the change effect is not executed (corresponding to the above-mentioned sunny mode and rain mode).
It is assumed that there is (corresponding to the above-mentioned lightning mode). That is, when the second effect mode is selected, the specific display is not displayed and the change effect is not executed, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are switched by the player's operation or the like. Is possible.

(Other variants)
In each of the above embodiments, the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream (an effect in which one or more temporary stops and re-variations of the symbol are executed during one variable display), etc. An example of transmitting one variation pattern command at the start of variation in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode has been shown, but the variation pattern is produced by two or more commands. The control microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, when notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560
As the first command, sends a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before reaching the reach (or before the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream and the presence / absence of a slip effect. As the second command, send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (or after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect. You may. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. .. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the following). A second command may be sent (in the timer interrupt). The variation mode shown by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "the ratio is different" means A: B = 70%: 30%.
And A: B = 30%: 70%, not only those with different ratios, A: B = 1
It is a concept that includes things with different ratios such as 00%: 0% (that is, one has 100% allocation and the other has 0% allocation).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and ordinary symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variable displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by repeatedly lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display alternately. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes, and encapsulates a gaming medium such as a gaming ball and grants a score when the conditions for granting prizes are satisfied. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variable region inside (a probability changing region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability change area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball passes through the probability change area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a command (designation) is used to determine whether or not a big hit is achieved on the game control microcomputer 560 side and to determine the winning time of the variation pattern type (look-ahead judgment), and to indicate the winning judgment result. A command, a variable category command) is transmitted, and a hold notice effect is executed based on a command indicating the winning determination result on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a command to specify only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted when the start winning is generated. And on the production control microcomputer 100 side,
It may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination) based on the value of a random number specified by those commands.

The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device (main display device)
9a 1st hold storage display unit 9b 2nd hold storage display unit 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine capable of variable display,
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display is provided.
As the change effect, the change effect execution means can execute an effect of changing the specific display of the first aspect to the second aspect having a higher advantage than the first aspect.
The second aspect includes a predetermined aspect and a specific aspect having a higher advantage than the predetermined aspect.
The change effect executing means is
As a change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third aspect when the specific display of the first aspect is not changed to the second aspect.
It is based on a first pattern in which the display mode of the specific display changed to the third aspect is changed to the specific mode, and a second pattern in which the display mode of the specific display changed to the third aspect is continuously displayed as it is. The production is feasible,
It is possible to execute the effect of the second pattern at a higher rate than the effect of the first pattern.
It is possible to execute multiple types of change effects with different rates of changing the display mode of a specific display.
The specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower rate of change to the predetermined mode than the specific display displayed by the first aspect.
Further comprising limiting means capable of limiting the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images